Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 424

FusionModule2000 6.

0 Smart Modular Data


Center

Installation Guide

Issue 06
Date 2023-11-30

HUAWEI DIGITAL POWER TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.


Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 2023. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior
written consent of Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei
Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features
described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise
specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are
provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Digital Power Antuoshan Headquarters

Futian, Shenzhen 518043

People's Republic of China

Website: https://digitalpower.huawei.com

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. i


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide About This Document

About This Document

Purpose
This document describes the site requirements for installing the
FusionModule2000 6.0 smart modular data center (smart module for short) as
well as the methods for installing cabinets, devices, and cables, providing
installation guidance and technical support for onsite installation personnel and
technical support engineers.

Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
● Hardware installation engineers
● Commissioning engineers
● Maintenance engineers
● Technical support engineers

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk


which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk


which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk


which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. ii


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide About This Document

Symbol Description

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation


which, if not avoided, could result in
equipment damage, data loss, performance
deterioration, or unanticipated results.
NOTICE is used to address practices not
related to personal injury.

Supplements the important information in the


main text.
NOTE is used to address information not
related to personal injury, equipment damage,
and environment deterioration.

Change History
Issue Date Description

06 2023-11-30 ● Updated 14.1.5 (Optional) Installing


an ECC800-Pro.
● Updated 10.6 (Optional) Installing
an End Door (with a Smart Screen,
21503054, 21503054-001, and
21503054-002).

05 2023-07-30 Added the procedure for installing an


alarm beacon (in the scenario with a
smart screen, 21503054).

04 2023-04-30 Added the section "Installing an Electric


Sliding Door (Smart Screen,
21501718-001)."

03 2023-03-15 Deleted the scenario where lithium


batteries are deployed inside a smart
module.

02 2023-01-30 Updated the description about installing


a multi-functional sensor.

01 2022-10-30 This issue is the first official release.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. iii
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide Contents

Contents

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii


1 Safety Information.................................................................................................................. 1
1.1 Personal Safety.........................................................................................................................................................................2
1.2 Electrical Safety........................................................................................................................................................................ 4
1.3 Environmental Requirements.............................................................................................................................................. 8
1.4 Mechanical Safety.................................................................................................................................................................10
1.5 Equipment Safety.................................................................................................................................................................. 15
1.5.1 UPS Safety............................................................................................................................................................................16
1.5.2 Cooling System Safety..................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.5.3 Battery Safety..................................................................................................................................................................... 17

2 Installation Preparations..................................................................................................... 23
2.1 Transportation and Placement Precautions................................................................................................................. 23
2.2 Unpacking and Acceptance............................................................................................................................................... 25
2.3 Installation Environment Check....................................................................................................................................... 26
2.4 Field Requirements............................................................................................................................................................... 30
2.5 Reference Documentation................................................................................................................................................. 32
2.6 Tools to Be Prepared Onsite.............................................................................................................................................. 34
2.6.1 Tools Delivered with Equipment...................................................................................................................................34
2.6.2 Tools and Instruments..................................................................................................................................................... 36
2.7 Construction Personnel Requirements...........................................................................................................................39
2.8 Scenario Description............................................................................................................................................................ 40
2.8.1 Power Supply and Distribution Cabinet Scenario.................................................................................................. 40
2.8.2 Smart Busbar Scenario.................................................................................................................................................... 41

3 Smart Module Layout Requirements................................................................................42


3.1 Layout Requirements for Standard Dual-Row Aisle Containment...................................................................... 42
3.2 Layout Requirements for Dual-Row Aisle Containment with a Column........................................................... 43

4 (Optional) Installing Bases................................................................................................. 49


4.1 Precautions for Installing Bases....................................................................................................................................... 49

5 Installing the PDF..................................................................................................................51


5.1 Moving the PDF..................................................................................................................................................................... 51
5.2 Installing an Enclosure Frame.......................................................................................................................................... 53

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. iv


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide Contents

5.3 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame.................................................................................................................................. 53

6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and Battery Cabinets.............................. 55


6.1 Moving Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and Battery Cabinets............................................................................. 55
6.2 (Optional) Installing Side Panels for IT Cabinets...................................................................................................... 56
6.3 (Optional) Taking Out rPDU Cables...............................................................................................................................58
6.4 (Optional) Taking Out Industrial Connectors............................................................................................................. 59
6.5 (Optional) Adjusting a Battery Cabinet Side Panel.................................................................................................. 60
6.6 (Optional) Installing a Battery Cabinet Top Frame.................................................................................................. 60
6.7 (Optional) Installing a Horizontal Ground Bar.......................................................................................................... 61
6.8 (Optional) Installing a Vertical Ground Bar................................................................................................................ 63

7 Installing Smart Cooling Products.................................................................................... 64


7.1 Installing NetCol5000-A(025, 035) Smart Cooling Products................................................................................. 64
7.1.1 (Optional) Installing an Enclosure Frame.................................................................................................................64
7.1.2 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Top Pipe Routing)........................................................................................ 65
7.1.3 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Bottom Pipe Routing)................................................................................. 67
7.1.4 (Optional) Installing an Adaptive Frame for a 300 mm Wide Smart Cooling Product............................ 68
7.1.5 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame for an Adaptive Frame................................................................................. 71
7.2 Installing NetCol5000-A050 Smart Cooling Products.............................................................................................. 72
7.2.1 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Top Pipe Routing)........................................................................................ 72
7.2.2 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Bottom Pipe Routing)................................................................................. 74
7.3 Installing FusionCol5000-A065 Smart Cooling Products.........................................................................................74
7.3.1 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Top Pipe Routing)........................................................................................ 74
7.3.2 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Bottom Pipe Routing)................................................................................. 75
7.4 Installing FusionCol5000-A050 Smart Cooling Products.........................................................................................75
7.4.1 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Top Pipe Routing)........................................................................................ 75
7.4.2 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Bottom Pipe Routing)................................................................................. 77

8 Combining Cabinets..............................................................................................................78
9 Grounding a Cabinet............................................................................................................ 84
10 Installing the Aisle Containment.................................................................................... 85
10.1 Installing Enclosure Plates Around a Column (in Scenarios with a Column)................................................85
10.2 Installing Skylights............................................................................................................................................................. 88
10.2.1 Skylight Layout................................................................................................................................................................ 89
10.2.2 Installing Control, Flat, and Rotating Skylights.................................................................................................... 89
10.2.3 Installing Skylight Magnetic Locks (02070262)................................................................................................... 94
10.2.4 Installing Adjustable Skylights (in Scenarios with a Column).........................................................................97
10.2.5 (Optional) Grounding Control Skylights.............................................................................................................. 104
10.3 Installing Cabinet Bottom Sealing Kits..................................................................................................................... 105
10.3.1 Installing Cabinet Bottom Sealing Kits..................................................................................................................105
10.3.2 Installing Bottom Sealing Kits for Cabinet Door Panels................................................................................. 109
10.4 Layout of Monitoring Devices on an End Door..................................................................................................... 113

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. v


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide Contents

10.4.1 Layout of Monitoring Devices on an End Door (FusionModule Actuator Scenario)............................ 114
10.4.2 Layout of Monitoring Devices on an End Door (Prefabricated Door Header Scenario)..................... 115
10.5 Installing Monitoring Devices on the End Door.................................................................................................... 116
10.5.1 Installing an Actuator................................................................................................................................................. 116
10.5.2 Installing an Alarm Beacon (22010028)...............................................................................................................118
10.5.3 Installing a Button........................................................................................................................................................ 119
10.5.4 Installing an Automatic Door Status Sensor (33010601)...............................................................................121
10.6 (Optional) Installing an End Door (with a Smart Screen, 21503054, 21503054-001, and
21503054-002)........................................................................................................................................................................... 122
10.6.1 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door (with a Smart Screen, 21503055).................................................... 122
10.6.2 (Optional) Installing an Electric Sliding Door (with a Smart Screen, 21503055-001).........................129
10.6.3 (Optional) Installing Smart Screen Door Boxes (21503054)........................................................................ 137
10.7 (Optional) Installing an End Door (Without a Smart Screen)......................................................................... 147
10.7.1 (Optional) Installing a Revolving Door (Standard Configuration, 21501043-004 or 21501044-002)
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 148
10.7.2 (Optional) Installing a Revolving Door (Advanced Configuration, 21501713 or 21501714)............ 158
10.7.3 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door (Standard Configuration, 21501112-003 or 21501113-002). 168
10.7.4 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door (Advanced Configuration, 21501718 or 21501712).................. 179
10.7.5 (Optional) Installing an Electric Sliding Door (21501718-001 or 21501712-001)................................ 191
10.8 (Optional) Installing an End Door (with a Smart Screen, 21502418)...........................................................203
10.8.1 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door (with a Smart Screen, 21501718).................................................... 203
10.8.2 (Optional) Installing an Electric Sliding Door (with a Smart Screen, 21501718-001).........................211
10.8.3 (Optional) Installing a PAD.......................................................................................................................................221
10.8.4 (Optional) Installing a Smart Screen..................................................................................................................... 224
10.9 (Optional) Installing an Access Control Device..................................................................................................... 226
10.9.1 Installing a Card Reader with a Keypad (02070172)....................................................................................... 226
10.9.2 Installing a Fingerprint and Card Reader (02070173).....................................................................................227
10.9.3 Installing a Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad (02070174)....................................................... 228
10.9.4 Installing an IC Card Reader (06080327)............................................................................................................. 230
10.9.5 (Optional) Installing a Cabinet Fingerprint and Card Reader Lock (02071312)....................................231
10.10 (Optional) Installing a Magnetic Lock................................................................................................................... 236
10.10.1 (Optional) Installing a Revolving Door Magnetic Lock (02070261)........................................................ 236
10.10.2 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door Magnetic Lock (02070215)..............................................................241
10.11 Installing a PAD Power Connector...........................................................................................................................243
10.12 (Optional) Installing the eLight (52220928)....................................................................................................... 246
10.13 (Optional) Installing Top Enclosure Plates for the Smart Module............................................................... 250
10.14 Attaching Cabinet Labels............................................................................................................................................ 251

11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and Cable Tray.......................................254


11.1 (Optional) Installing a Smart Busbar........................................................................................................................254
11.2 Installing Cable Troughs................................................................................................................................................ 254
11.2.1 (Optional) Installing Mesh Cable Troughs...........................................................................................................255
11.2.2 (Optional) Installing Cable Troughs (600 mm or 800 mm Wide)...............................................................258
11.2.3 (Optional) Installing Cable Troughs (300 mm Wide)...................................................................................... 262

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. vi


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide Contents

11.2.4 Installing End Panels for Cable Troughs............................................................................................................... 264


11.3 Installing Cable Trays...................................................................................................................................................... 265
11.3.1 (Optional) Installing Cable Trays (Dual-Row Scenario)..................................................................................265
11.3.2 Installing Cable Trays (in Scenarios with a Column)....................................................................................... 267
11.3.3 (Optional) Installing Indoor Cable Trays.............................................................................................................. 270
11.3.4 (Optional) Grounding Cable Trays......................................................................................................................... 271

12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights............................................................. 272


12.1 Installing Aisle Lights...................................................................................................................................................... 272
12.2 (Optional) Installing Atmosphere Lights (52221117)......................................................................................... 277

13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices....................................................282


13.1 Installing an rPDU............................................................................................................................................................282
13.2 Installing a PDU2000M.................................................................................................................................................. 286
13.3 (Optional) Installing UPSs Outside the Smart Module...................................................................................... 290
13.4 (Optional) Installing Battery Cabinets Outside the Smart Module................................................................290
13.5 (Optional) Installing Lead-Acid Batteries................................................................................................................ 290
13.6 (Optional) Installing the SmartLi Outside the Smart Module......................................................................... 291
13.7 (Optional) Installing a Power Distribution Box for Smart Cooling Products.............................................. 291
13.8 Installing a Smart Busbar.............................................................................................................................................. 294

14 Installing Monitoring Devices........................................................................................ 295


14.1 Equipment Layout in the Network Cabinet............................................................................................................ 295
14.1.1 (Optional) Installing a TaiShan 200 Server......................................................................................................... 296
14.1.2 (Optional) Installing a 2288X V5 Server.............................................................................................................. 298
14.1.3 Installing an IVS1800...................................................................................................................................................300
14.1.4 Installing a LAN Switch.............................................................................................................................................. 305
14.1.4.1 Installing a LAN Switch (Smart Module Scenario)........................................................................................305
14.1.4.2 (Optional) Installing a LAN Switch (Smart Busbar 2.0 Scenario)............................................................ 307
14.1.5 (Optional) Installing an ECC800-Pro..................................................................................................................... 307
14.2 UIM20A Expansion Module Configuration Principles..........................................................................................311
14.3 Installing a UIM20A Expansion Module................................................................................................................... 314
14.4 Installing a Smart U Space Manager (Connecting to the UIM20A Expansion Module, 52275819)... 315
14.5 Installing a Smart U Space Manager (Connecting to the PDU2000M Main Control Module,
52275819).................................................................................................................................................................................... 317
14.6 (Optional) Installing a Cabinet Temperature Sensor (Connecting to the UIM20A Expansion Module,
33010557).................................................................................................................................................................................... 318
14.7 (Optional) Installing a Cabinet Temperature Sensor (Connecting to the PDU2000M Main Control
Module, 33010557)................................................................................................................................................................... 322
14.8 Installing Monitoring Devices on a Control Skylight........................................................................................... 324
14.8.1 Installing a Camera (02233JGP).............................................................................................................................. 325
14.8.2 (Optional) Installing a Smoke Detector (33010311)....................................................................................... 328
14.8.3 (Optional) Installing Multi-Functional Sensors................................................................................................. 329
14.9 Installing Monitoring Devices on Cable Troughs.................................................................................................. 330
14.9.1 Layout of Smart ETH Gateways (FusionModule Actuator Dual-Row Scenario).................................... 331

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide Contents

14.9.2 Installing a Smart ETH Gateway (Cable Trough Scenario)............................................................................ 332


14.9.3 Installing a Smart ETH Gateway (Mesh Cable Trough Scenario)................................................................ 333
14.10 Rules for Deploying T/H Sensors..............................................................................................................................334
14.11 Installing a T/H Sensor (33010516)........................................................................................................................ 336
14.11.1 Installing a T/H Sensor............................................................................................................................................. 336
14.11.2 (Optional) Installing an Ambient T/H Sensor (33010516)..........................................................................340
14.12 Installing a WLDS900 Water Sensor (33010352)...............................................................................................341
14.12.1 Laying Out the Water Detection Cable (Dual-Row Scenario)....................................................................342
14.12.2 Connecting a Cable to the WLDS900 Water Sensor...................................................................................... 343
14.12.3 Routing the Water Detection Cable.....................................................................................................................345
14.13 Installing a GSM Modem............................................................................................................................................ 347

15 Connecting Cables............................................................................................................ 349


15.1 System Cabling Rules......................................................................................................................................................349
15.2 Cable Connection Process............................................................................................................................................. 354
15.3 Cable Routes for the Dual-Row Aisle Containment Scenario (Power Supply and Distribution Cabinet)
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 355
15.4 Cable Routes for the Dual-Row Aisle Containment Scenario (Smart Busbar)........................................... 357
15.5 Cable Routes for the Dual-Row Aisle Containment Scenario (Smart Busbar 2.0 LAN Switch)............359
15.6 (Optional) Cable Routes for a Smart Cooling Product PDB..............................................................................362
15.7 Connecting Cables for the Power Supply and Distribution System................................................................363
15.7.1 rPDU Naming in an IT Cabinet................................................................................................................................ 363
15.7.2 (Optional) Connecting Cables to an Integrated PDF....................................................................................... 365
15.7.3 (Optional) Connecting Cables to an Integrated UPS....................................................................................... 369
15.7.4 (Optional) Connecting Cables to a Precision PDF............................................................................................ 371
15.7.5 (Optional) Connecting Cables to Lead-Acid Batteries.....................................................................................376
15.7.6 (Optional) Connecting Cables to the SmartLi Outside the Smart Module.............................................. 381
15.7.7 (Optional) Installing Smart Busbar Cables.......................................................................................................... 381
15.7.8 (Optional) Connecting Cables to Industrial Connectors................................................................................. 381
15.7.9 (Optional) Connecting rPDU Cables...................................................................................................................... 382
15.7.10 Connecting Smart rPDU Signal Cables (Connected to the UIM20A Expansion Module)................. 383
15.8 Connecting Cables for the Cooling System............................................................................................................. 385
15.9 Installing Cables for the Facility Management System...................................................................................... 385
15.10 Cable Routes for Aisle Lights (FusionModule Actuator Scenario)................................................................386
15.11 Cable Routes for the PAD and Access Control Device...................................................................................... 386
15.12 Cable Route Between the Smart Screen and Smart ETH Gateway..............................................................387
15.13 Cable Route Between the Smart Screen and LAN Switch............................................................................... 388
15.14 Cable Routes for Cabinet Card and Fingerprint Locks...................................................................................... 389
15.15 Cable Route for the FusionModule Actuator....................................................................................................... 392

A Appendix............................................................................................................................... 394
A.1 Installing an Expansion Bolt........................................................................................................................................... 394
A.2 Cable Routes Inside an IT Cabinet............................................................................................................................... 395
A.3 Cable Routes for the Network Cabinet...................................................................................................................... 399

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. viii
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide Contents

A.4 Preparing Monitoring Cables......................................................................................................................................... 400


A.5 L1 Power Supply Solution (FusionModule Actuator Scenario).......................................................................... 402
A.6 (Optional) Connecting Linkage Cables Between the Gas Extinguishing Controller and Equipment
Room ATS..................................................................................................................................................................................... 402
A.7 (Optional) Connecting Linkage Cables Between the Equipment Room Fire Extinguishing System and
Access Actuator.......................................................................................................................................................................... 404

B Verifying the Installation.................................................................................................. 405


C Common Screw Torques.................................................................................................... 409
D Acronyms and Abbreviations........................................................................................... 412

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. ix


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

1 Safety Information

Statement
Before transporting, storing, installing, operating, using, and/or maintaining
the equipment, read this document, strictly follow the instructions provided
herein, and follow all the safety instructions on the equipment and in this
document. In this document, "equipment" refers to the products, software,
components, spare parts, and/or services related to this document; "the Company"
refers to the manufacturer (producer), seller, and/or service provider of the
equipment; "you" refers to the entity that transports, stores, installs, operates,
uses, and/or maintains the equipment.

The Danger, Warning, Caution, and Notice statements described in this


document do not cover all the safety precautions. You also need to comply with
relevant international, national, or regional standards and industry practices. The
Company shall not be liable for any consequences that may arise due to
violations of safety requirements or safety standards concerning the design,
production, and usage of the equipment.

The equipment shall be used in an environment that meets the design


specifications. Otherwise, the equipment may be faulty, malfunctioning, or
damaged, which is not covered under the warranty. The Company shall not be
liable for any property loss, personal injury, or even death caused thereby.

Comply with applicable laws, regulations, standards, and specifications during


transportation, storage, installation, operation, use, and maintenance.

Do not perform reverse engineering, decompilation, disassembly, adaptation,


implantation, or other derivative operations on the equipment software. Do not
study the internal implementation logic of the equipment, obtain the source code
of the equipment software, violate intellectual property rights, or disclose any of
the performance test results of the equipment software.

The Company shall not be liable for any of the following circumstances or
their consequences:

● Equipment damage due to force majeure such as earthquakes, floods,


volcanic eruptions, debris flows, lightning strikes, fires, wars, armed conflicts,
typhoons, hurricanes, tornadoes, and extreme weather conditions
● Operation beyond the conditions specified in this document

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 1


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● Installation or use in environments that do not comply with international,


national, or regional standards
● Installation or use by unqualified personnel
● Failure to follow the operation instructions and safety precautions on the
product and in the document
● Unauthorized modifications to the product or software code or removal of the
product
● Damage caused during transportation by you or a third party authorized by
you
● Storage conditions that do not meet the requirements specified in the product
document
● Failure to comply with local laws, regulations, or related standards due to the
materials and tools prepared by you
● Damage caused by your or a third party's negligence, intentional breach,
gross negligence, or improper operations or damage not caused by the
Company

1.1 Personal Safety

DANGER

Do not work with power on during installation. Do not install or remove a cable
with power on. Transient contact between the core of the cable and the conductor
will generate electric arcs or sparks, which may cause a fire or personal injury.

DANGER

Non-standard and improper operations on the energized equipment may cause


fire or electric shocks, resulting in property damage, personal injury, or even death.

DANGER

Before operations, remove conductive objects such as watches, bracelets, bangles,


rings, and necklaces to prevent electric shocks.

DANGER

During operations, use dedicated insulated tools to prevent electric shocks or short
circuits. The insulation and voltage resistance must comply with local laws,
regulations, standards, and specifications.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 2


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

WARNING

During operations, wear personal protective equipment such as protective


clothing, insulated shoes, goggles, safety helmets, and insulated gloves.

Figure 1-1 Personal protective equipment

General Requirements
● Do not stop protective devices. Pay attention to the warnings, cautions, and
related precautionary measures in this document and on the equipment.
● If there is a likelihood of personal injury or equipment damage during
operations, immediately stop, report the case to the supervisor, and take
feasible protective measures.
● Do not power on the equipment before it is installed or confirmed by
professionals.
● Do not touch the power supply equipment directly or with conductors such as
damp objects. Before touching any conductor surface or terminal, measure
the voltage at the contact point to ensure that there is no risk of electric
shock.
● Do not touch a running fan with your hands, components, screws, tools, or
boards. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment damage may occur.
● In the case of a fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment area
and activate the fire alarm or call emergency services. Do not enter the
affected building or equipment area under any circumstances.

Personnel Requirements
● Only professionals and trained personnel are allowed to operate the
equipment.
– Professionals: personnel who are familiar with the working principles and
structure of the equipment, trained or experienced in equipment
operations and are clear of the sources and degree of various potential
hazards in equipment installation, operation, maintenance
– Trained personnel: personnel who are trained in technology and safety,
have required experience, are aware of possible hazards on themselves in

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 3


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

certain operations, and are able to take protective measures to minimize


the hazards on themselves and other people
● Personnel who plan to install or maintain the equipment must receive
adequate training, be able to correctly perform all operations, and understand
all necessary safety precautions and local relevant standards.
● Only qualified professionals or trained personnel are allowed to install,
operate, and maintain the equipment.
● Only qualified professionals are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspect
the equipment.
● Personnel who will perform special tasks such as electrical operations,
working at heights, and operations of special equipment must possess the
required local qualifications.
● Only authorized professionals are allowed to replace the equipment or
components (including software).
● Only personnel who need to work on the equipment are allowed to access
the equipment.

1.2 Electrical Safety

DANGER

Before connecting cables, ensure that the equipment is intact. Otherwise, electric
shocks or fires may occur.

DANGER

Non-standard and improper operations may result in fire or electric shocks.

DANGER

Prevent foreign matter from entering the equipment during operations. Otherwise,
equipment damage, load power derating, power failure, or personal injury may
occur.

WARNING

For the equipment that needs to be grounded, install the ground cable first when
installing the equipment and remove the ground cable last when removing the
equipment.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 4


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

CAUTION

Do not route cables near the air intake or exhaust vents of the equipment.

CAUTION

Do not directly connect aluminum cables to prevent electrochemical corrosion of


copper and aluminum.

CAUTION

Stay away from the equipment when preparing cables to prevent cable scraps
from entering the equipment. Cable scraps may cause sparks and result in
personal injury and equipment damage.

General Requirements
● Follow the procedures described in the document for installation, operation,
and maintenance. Do not reconstruct or alter the equipment, add
components, or change the installation sequence without permission.
● Install temporary fences or warning ropes and hang "No Entry" signs around
the operation area to keep unauthorized personnel away from the area.
● Before installing or removing power cables, turn off the switches of the
equipment and its upstream and downstream switches.
● If any liquid is detected inside the equipment, disconnect the power supply
immediately and do not use the equipment.
● Before performing operations on the equipment, check that all tools meet the
requirements and record the tools. After the operations are complete, collect
all of the tools to prevent them from being left inside the equipment.
● Before installing power cables, check that cable labels are correct and cable
terminals are insulated.
● When installing the equipment, use a torque tool of a proper measurement
range to tighten the screws. When using a wrench to tighten the screws,
ensure that the wrench does not tilt and the torque error does not exceed
10% of the specified value.
● Ensure that bolts are tightened with a torque tool and marked in red and blue
after double-check. Installation personnel mark tightened bolts in blue.
Quality inspection personnel confirm that the bolts are tightened and then
mark them in red. (The marks must cross the edges of the bolts.)

● After the installation is complete, ensure that protective cases, insulation


tubes, and other necessary items for all electrical components are in position
to avoid electric shocks.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 5


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● If the equipment has multiple inputs, disconnect all the inputs before
operating the equipment.
● Before maintaining a downstream electrical or power distribution device, turn
off the output switch on the power supply equipment.
● During equipment maintenance, attach "Do not switch on" labels near the
upstream and downstream switches or circuit breakers as well as warning
signs to prevent accidental connection. The equipment can be powered on
only after troubleshooting is complete.
● If fault diagnosis and troubleshooting need to be performed after power-off,
take the following safety measures: Disconnect the power supply. Check
whether the equipment is live. Install a ground cable. Hang warning signs and
set up fences.
● Check equipment connections periodically, ensuring that all screws are
securely tightened.
● Only qualified professionals can replace a damaged cable.
● Do not scrawl, damage, or block any labels or nameplates on the equipment.
Promptly replace labels that have worn out.
● Do not use solvents such as water, alcohol, or oil to clean electrical
components inside or outside of the equipment.
● Wear personal protective equipment and use dedicated insulated tools to
avoid electric shocks or short circuits.
● Do not use wet cloth to clean exposed copper bars or other conductive parts.

Grounding
● Ensure that the grounding impedance of the equipment complies with local
electrical standards.
● Ensure that the equipment is connected permanently to the protective
ground. Before operating the equipment, check its electrical connection to
ensure that it is reliably grounded.
● Ensure that the protective ground point of the equipment is reliably
connected to the ground screw of the metal enclosure (connection resistance:
≤ 0.1 ohms).
● Ensure that the ground resistance of the system for lightning protection is less
than or equal to 10 ohms.
● Do not operate the equipment in the absence of a properly installed ground
conductor.
● Do not damage the ground conductor.
● If high touch current may occur on the equipment, ground the protective
ground terminal on the equipment enclosure before connecting the power
supply; otherwise, electric shock as a result of touch current may occur.

Cabling
● When selecting, installing, and routing cables, follow local safety regulations
and rules.
● The flame spread rating of cables shall meet the UL 1581 VW-1 or IEC
60332-3-22 (ZB) or higher requirements.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 6


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● When routing power cables, ensure that there is no coiling or twisting. Do not
join or weld power cables. If necessary, use a longer cable.
● Ensure that all cables are properly connected and insulated, and meet
specifications.
● Ensure that the slots and holes for routing cables are free from sharp edges,
and that the positions where cables are routed through pipes or cable holes
are equipped with cushion materials to prevent the cables from being
damaged by sharp edges or burrs.
● If a cable is connected to the cabinet from the top, bend the cable in a U
shape outside the cabinet and then route it into the cabinet.
● Ensure that cables of the same type are bound together neatly and straight
and that the cable sheath is intact. When routing cables of different types,
ensure that they are at least 30 mm away from each other.
● If the external conditions (such as the cable layout or ambient temperature)
change, verify the cable usage in accordance with the IEC-60364-5-52 or local
laws and regulations. For example, check that the current-carrying capacity
meets requirements.
● When routing cables, reserve at least 30 mm clearance between the cables
and heat-generating components or areas. This prevents deterioration or
damage to the cable insulation layer.
● When the temperature is low, violent impact or vibration may damage the
plastic cable sheathing. To ensure safety, comply with the following
requirements:
– Cables can be laid or installed only when the temperature is higher than
0°C. Handle cables with caution, especially at a low temperature.
– Cables stored at subzero temperatures must be stored at room
temperature for at least 24 hours before they are laid out.
● Do not perform any improper operations, for example, dropping cables
directly from a vehicle. Otherwise, the cable performance may deteriorate due
to cable damage, which affects the current-carrying capacity and temperature
rise.

ESD

NOTICE

The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-
sensitive components on boards, for example, the large-scale integrated (LSI)
circuits.

● When touching the equipment and handling boards, modules with exposed
circuit boards, or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs), observe ESD
protection regulations and wear ESD clothing and ESD gloves or a well-
grounded ESD wrist strap.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 7


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

Figure 1-2 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

● When holding a board or a module with exposed circuit boards, hold its edge
without touching any components. Do not touch the components with bare
hands.
● Package boards or modules with ESD packaging materials before storing or
transporting them.

1.3 Environmental Requirements

DANGER

Do not expose the equipment to flammable or explosive gas or smoke. Do not


perform any operation on the equipment in such environments.

DANGER

Do not store any flammable or explosive materials in the equipment area.

DANGER

Do not place the equipment near heat sources or fire sources, such as smoke,
candles, heaters, or other heating devices. Overheat may damage the equipment
or cause a fire.

WARNING

Install the equipment in an area far away from liquids. Do not install it under
areas prone to condensation, such as under water pipes and air exhaust vents, or
areas prone to water leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation vents, or
feeder windows of the equipment room. Ensure that no liquid enters the
equipment to prevent faults or short circuits.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 8


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

WARNING

To prevent damage or fire due to high temperature, ensure that the ventilation
vents or heat dissipation systems are not obstructed or covered by other objects
while the equipment is running.

General Requirements
● Ensure that the equipment is stored in a clean, dry, and well ventilated area
with proper temperature and humidity and is protected from dust and
condensation.
● Keep the installation and operating environments of the equipment within the
allowed ranges. Otherwise, its performance and safety will be compromised.
● Do not install, use, or operate outdoor equipment and cables (including but
not limited to moving equipment, operating equipment and cables, inserting
connectors to or removing connectors from signal ports connected to outdoor
facilities, working at heights, performing outdoor installation, and opening
doors) in harsh weather conditions such as lightning, rain, snow, and level 6
or stronger wind.
● Do not install the equipment in an environment with direct sunlight, dust,
smoke, volatile or corrosive gases, infrared and other radiations, organic
solvents, or salty air.
● Do not install the equipment in an environment with conductive metal or
magnetic dust.
● Do not install the equipment in an area conducive to the growth of
microorganisms such as fungus or mildew.
● Do not install the equipment in an area with strong vibration, noise, or
electromagnetic interference.
● Ensure that the site complies with local laws, regulations, and related
standards.
● Ensure that the ground in the installation environment is solid, free from
spongy or soft soil, and not prone to subsidence. The site must not be located
in a low-lying land prone to water or snow accumulation, and the horizontal
level of the site must be above the highest water level of that area in history.
● Before opening doors during the installation, operation, and maintenance of
the equipment, clean up any water, ice, snow, or other foreign objects on the
top of the equipment to prevent foreign objects from falling into the
equipment.
● When installing the equipment, ensure that the installation surface is solid
enough to bear the weight of the equipment.
● Ensure that the equipment room provides good heat insulation, and that the
walls and floor are dampproof.
● Install protective devices at the door of the equipment room to prevent
rodents and insects from entering the room.
● All cable holes must be sealed. Seal the used cable holes with sealing putty.
Seal the unused cable holes with the caps delivered with the equipment. The
following figure shows the criteria for correct sealing with sealing putty.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 9


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● After installing the equipment, remove idle packing materials such as cartons,
foam, plastics, and cable ties from the equipment area.

1.4 Mechanical Safety

DANGER

When working at heights, wear a safety helmet and safety harness or waist belt
and fasten it to a solid structure. Do not mount it on an insecure moveable object
or a metal object with sharp edges. Make sure that the hooks will not slide off.

WARNING

Ensure that all necessary tools are ready and inspected by a professional
organization. Do not use tools that have signs of scratches or fail to pass the
inspection or whose inspection validity period has expired. Ensure that the tools
are secure and not overloaded.

WARNING

Before installing equipment in a cabinet, ensure that the cabinet is securely


fastened with a balanced center of gravity. Otherwise, tipping or falling cabinets
may cause bodily injury and equipment damage.

WARNING

When pulling equipment out of a cabinet, be aware of unstable or heavy objects


in the cabinet to prevent injury.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 10


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

WARNING

Do not drill holes into the equipment. Doing so may affect the sealing and
electromagnetic interference shield performance of the equipment and damage
components or cables inside. Metal shavings from drilling may short-circuit boards
inside the equipment.

General Requirements
● Repaint any paint scratches caused during equipment transportation or
installation in a timely manner. Equipment with scratches cannot be exposed
for an extended period of time.
● Do not perform operations such as arc welding and cutting on the equipment
without evaluation by the Company.
● Do not install other devices on the top of the equipment without evaluation
by the Company.
● When performing operations above the equipment, take measures to protect
the equipment against damage.
● Use correct tools and operate them in the correct way.

Moving Heavy Objects


● Be cautious to prevent injury when moving heavy objects.

● If multiple persons need to move a heavy object together, determine the


manpower and work division with consideration of height and other
conditions to ensure that the weight is evenly distributed.
● If two persons or more move a heavy object together, ensure that the object
is lifted and landed simultaneously and moved at a uniform pace under the
supervision of one person.
● Wear personal protective gears such as protective gloves and shoes when
manually moving the equipment.
● To move an object by hand, approach the object, squat down, and then lift
the object slowly and stably by the force of the legs instead of your back. Do
not lift it suddenly or turn or twist your body.
● Move or lift the equipment by holding its handles or lower edges. Do not hold
the handles of modules that are installed in the equipment.
● Slowly lift a heavy object above your waist. Place the object on a workbench
that is half-waist high or any other appropriate place, adjust the positions of
your palms, and then lift it.
● Move a heavy object stably with balanced force at an even and low speed. Put
down the object stably and slowly to prevent any collision or drop that may
cause scratches on the surface of the equipment or damage to the
components and cables.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 11


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● When moving a heavy object, be aware of the workbench, slope, staircase,


and slippery places. When moving a heavy object through a door, ensure that
the door is wide enough to move the object and avoid bumping or injury.
● When transferring a heavy object, move your feet instead of twisting your
waist. When lifting and transferring a heavy object, ensure that your feet
point to the target direction of movement.
● When transporting the equipment using a forklift truck, ensure that the forks
are properly positioned so that the equipment does not topple. Before moving
the equipment, secure it to the forklift truck using ropes. When moving the
equipment, assign dedicated personnel to take care of it.
● Choose sea or roads in good conditions for transportation. Do not transport
batteries by railway or air. Avoid tilt or jolt during transportation.
● When transporting a cabinet, ensure that its tilt angle meets the requirements
shown in the figure. The tilt angle α of a cabinet with packaging shall be less
than or equal to 15°. After the cabinet is unpacked, its tilt angle α shall be
less than or equal to 10°.

Working at Heights
● Any operations performed 2 meters or higher above the ground must be
supervised properly.
● Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work at heights.
● Do not work at heights when steel pipes are wet or other risky situations
exist. After the preceding conditions no longer exist, the safety owner and
relevant technical personnel need to check the involved equipment. Operators
can begin working only after safety is confirmed.
● Set a restricted area and prominent signs for working at heights to warn
irrelevant personnel away.
● Set guard rails and warning signs at the edges and openings of the area
involving working at heights to prevent falls.
● Do not pile up scaffolding, springboards, or other sundries on the ground
under the area involving working at heights. Do not stay or pass under the
area involving working at heights.
● Carry operation machines and tools properly to prevent equipment damage or
personal injury caused by falling objects.
● Personnel involving working at heights are not allowed to throw objects from
the height to the ground, or vice versa. Objects shall be transported by slings,
hanging baskets, aerial work platforms, or cranes.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 12


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● Do not perform operations on the upper and lower layers at the same time. If
unavoidable, install a dedicated protective shelter between the upper and
lower layers or take other protective measures. Do not pile up tools or
materials on the upper layer.
● Dismantle the scaffolding from top down after finishing the job. Do not
dismantle the upper and lower layers at the same time. When removing a
part, ensure that other parts will not collapse.
● Ensure that personnel working at heights strictly comply with the safety
regulations. The Company is not responsible for any accident caused by
violation of the safety regulations on working at heights.
● Behave cautiously when working at heights. Do not rest at heights.

Using Ladders
● Use wooden or insulated ladders when you need to perform live-line working
at heights.
● Platform ladders with protective rails are preferred. Single ladders are not
recommended.
● Before using a ladder, check that it is intact and confirm its load bearing
capacity. Do not overload it.
● Ensure that the ladder is securely positioned and held firm.

● When climbing up the ladder, keep your body stable and your center of
gravity between the side rails, and do not overreach to the sides.
● When a step ladder is used, ensure that the pull ropes are secured.
● If a single ladder is used, the recommended angle for the ladder against the
floor is 75 degrees, as shown in the following figure. A square can be used to
measure the angle.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 13


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● If a single ladder is used, ensure that the wider end of the ladder is at the
bottom, and take protective measures to prevent the ladder from sliding.
● If a single ladder is used, do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the
ladder from the top.
● If you use a single ladder to climb up to a platform, ensure that the ladder is
at least 1 m higher than the platform.

Hoisting
● Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to perform hoisting
operations.
● Install temporary warning signs or fences to isolate the hoisting area.
● Ensure that the foundation where hoisting is performed meets the load-
bearing requirements.
● Before hoisting objects, ensure that hoisting tools are firmly secured onto a
fixed object or wall that meets the load-bearing requirements.
● During hoisting, do not stand or walk under the crane or the hoisted objects.
● Do not drag steel ropes and hoisting tools or bump hoisted objects against
hard objects during hoisting.
● Ensure that the angle between two hoisting ropes is no more than 90
degrees, as shown in the following figure.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 14


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

Drilling Holes
● Obtain consent from the customer and contractor before drilling holes.
● Wear protective equipment such as safety goggles and protective gloves when
drilling holes.
● To avoid short circuits or other risks, do not drill holes into buried pipes or
cables.
● When drilling holes, protect the equipment from shavings. After drilling, clean
up any shavings.

Welding
● A welder must have a work permit. Obtain consent from the customer before
welding.
● Ensure that at least two persons are present onsite for welding and that fire
extinguishers, wet cloth, and water containers are available.
● Ensure that the welding site is free from inflammables.
● Do not weld or cut on pressurized containers or pipes. Electric devices shall be
powered off before welding.
● A burning welding torch must not be placed on a component or on the floor,
and must not be placed in a metal container with acetylene and oxygen.
Otherwise, the gas may leak and cause a fire.
● High-temperature pipes after welding must be promptly cooled.

1.5 Equipment Safety

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 15


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

1.5.1 UPS Safety


General Requirements
● The UPS is used for commercial and industrial purposes only. It cannot be
used as a power supply for life support devices.
● For power supply systems that are critical to significant economic interests or
public order, such as the national computing center, emergency command
center, railway signal system and control center, civil aviation and air traffic
control center, airport command center, financial clearing center, and
transaction center, the Tier 4 or 3 power architecture specified in TIA-942
must be used. That is, two power supplies must be used to supply power to
loads.
● The UPS operating environment must meet the requirements for the climate
indicator, mechanically active substance indicator, and chemically active
substance indicator specified by ETSI EN 300 019-1 class 3.6.
● The UPS shall not be located in non-confined environments within 0–3.7 km
away from the ocean or indoor or semi-indoor environments where the
temperature and humidity are not controllable, such as shelters, civil houses,
garages, corridors, and direct ventilation cabinets near the ocean; or houses
with only roofs, railway station platforms, gymnasiums, and aquariums.
● It is recommended that the UPS be powered on as soon as possible after it is
unpacked.
● The UPS can be used to serve resistive-capacitive loads, resistive loads, and
micro-inductive loads. It is recommended that the UPS not be used for pure
capacitive loads, pure inductive loads, or half-wave rectification loads. The
UPS does not apply to regeneration loads.
● The UPS can be configured with a backfeed protection dry contact to work
with an external automatic circuit breaker, preventing the voltage from
flowing back to input terminals over static bypass circuits. If the installation
and maintenance personnel do not need backfeed protection, attach labels on
external mains and bypass input switches, informing that the UPS is
connected to a backfeed protection card. Disconnect the backfeed protection
card from the UPS before operating the UPS.
● The upstream power distribution of the UPS must meet the requirements of
protection against electric shock specified in IEC 60364-4-41.
● A circuit breaker equipped with a residual current device (RCD) is not
recommended.
● If the root mean square (RMS) of a phase voltage of the utility power exceeds
320 V AC, the UPS may be damaged.
● To ensure power supply to loads during UPS upgrade, set the output to
maintenance bypass mode. To avoid power failure or load damage, ensure
that the bypass input is within the specified power supply range.
● Exercise caution when manually shutting down the UPS inverter for
transferring to bypass mode, or when adjusting the UPS output voltage level
or output frequency. Doing so may affect the power supply to equipment.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 16


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

1.5.2 Cooling System Safety

High Temperature and Pressure


● Keep devices away from fire or high-temperature objects, especially devices
injected with pressurized nitrogen or refrigerant; otherwise, explosion or
refrigerant leakage may occur, causing personal injury.
● When maintaining or replacing components, pay attention to high-
temperature components (such as the compressor, refrigerant pipe, and
electric heater) to prevent scalds.
● When maintaining or replacing components, pay attention to high-pressure
components (such as the compressor and refrigerant pipe) to prevent the
refrigerant system from being cracked or exploded due to misoperations.

Refrigerant Frostbite
Refrigerant leakage may cause frostbite. Take protective measures (for example,
wear antifreeze gloves) when handling refrigerant.

Recycling

The sign indicates that the product cannot be disposed of with other wastes
that have a shell in European Union (EU) areas. To avoid environment pollution
and harm to human health, wastes must be classified and recycled. This also
promotes resource sustainability. To recycle an old device, use a recycling
collection system or contact the supplier.

1.5.3 Battery Safety

DANGER

Do not connect the positive and negative poles of a battery or battery string
together. Otherwise, the battery may be short-circuited. Battery short circuits can
generate high instantaneous current and releases a large amount of energy, which
may cause battery leakage, smoke, flammable gas release, thermal runaway, fire,
or explosion. To avoid battery short circuits, do not maintain batteries with power
on.

DANGER

Do not expose batteries at high temperatures or around heat sources, such as


scorching sunlight, fire sources, transformers, and heaters. Battery overheating
may cause leakage, smoke, flammable gas release, thermal runaway, fire, or
explosion.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 17


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

DANGER

Protect batteries from mechanical vibration, falling, collision, punctures, and


strong impact. Otherwise, the batteries may be damaged or catch fire.

DANGER

To avoid leakage, smoke, flammable gas release, thermal runaway, fire, or


explosion, do not disassemble, alter, or damage batteries, for example, insert
foreign matter into batteries, squeeze batteries, or immerse batteries in water or
other liquids.

DANGER

There is a risk of fire or explosion if the model of the battery in use or used for
replacement is incorrect. Use a battery of the model recommended by the vendor.

DANGER

Battery electrolyte is toxic and volatile. Do not get contact with leaked liquids or
gases in the case of battery leakage or emission of abnormal odor. In such cases,
stay away from the battery and contact professionals immediately. Professionals
shall wear safety goggles, rubber gloves, gas masks, and protective clothing,
power off the equipment, remove the battery, and contact technical engineers.

DANGER

The gases generated by a burning battery may irritate your eyes, skin, and throat.
Take protective measures.

WARNING

Install batteries in a dry area. Do not install them below areas prone to water
leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation vents, feeder windows of the
equipment room, or water pipes. Ensure that no liquid enters the equipment to
prevent faults or short circuits.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 18


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

WARNING

Before installing and commissioning batteries, prepare fire fighting facilities, such
as fire sand and carbon dioxide fire extinguishers, according to construction
standards and regulations. Before putting the battery room into operation, ensure
that it is equipped with a fire extinguishing system that complies with local laws
and regulations, has been constructed and commissioned, and can work in
automatic or manual control mode.

WARNING

Before unpacking, storage, and transportation, ensure that the packing cases are
intact and correctly placed according to the labels on the packing cases. Do not
place a battery upside down or vertically, lay it on one side, or tilt it. Stack the
batteries according to the stacking requirements on the packing cases. Ensure that
the batteries do not fall or get damaged. Otherwise, they will need to be scrapped.

WARNING

After unpacking batteries, place them in the required direction. Do not place a
battery with its front panel facing upwards, put it upside down, tilt it, or stack it.
Ensure that the batteries do not fall or get damaged. Otherwise, they will need to
be scrapped.

WARNING

Tighten the screws on copper bars or cables to the torque specified in this
document. Periodically confirm whether the screws are tightened, check for rust,
corrosion, or other foreign objects, and clean them up if any. Loose screw
connections will result in excessive voltage drops and batteries may catch fire
when the current is high.

WARNING

After batteries are discharged, charge them in time to avoid damage due to
overdischarge.

Statement
The Company shall not be liable for any damage or other consequences to
the batteries it provides due to the following reasons:
● Batteries are damaged due to force majeure such as earthquakes, floods,
volcanic eruptions, debris flows, lightning strikes, fires, wars, armed conflicts,
typhoons, hurricanes, tornadoes, and extreme weather conditions.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 19


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● Batteries are damaged because the onsite equipment operating environment


or external power parameters do not meet the environment requirements for
normal operation, for example, the actual operating temperature of batteries
is too high or too low, or the power grid is unstable and experiences outages
frequently.
● Batteries are damaged, fall, leak, or crack due to improper operations or
incorrect connection.
● After being installed and connected to the system, the batteries are not
powered on in time due to your reasons, which causes damage to the
batteries due to overdischarge.
● Batteries are damaged because they are not accepted in time due to your
reasons.
● You set battery operating parameters incorrectly.
● You use batteries of different types together, causing acceleration of capacity
attenuation. For example, you use our batteries together with batteries of
other vendors or with batteries of different rated capacity.
● You maintain batteries improperly, causing frequent overdischarge; you
expand the load capacity without notifying us; or you have not fully charged
the batteries for a long time.
● You do not perform battery maintenance based on the operation guide, such
as failure to check battery terminals regularly.
● Batteries are damaged because you do not store them in accordance with
storage requirements (for example, in an environment that is damp or prone
to rain).
● Batteries are not charged as required during storage due to your reasons,
resulting in capacity loss or other irreversible damages to the batteries.
● Batteries are damaged due to your or a third party's reasons, for example,
relocating or reinstalling the batteries without complying with the Company's
requirements.
● You change the battery use scenarios without notifying the Company.
● You connect extra loads to the batteries.
● The battery storage period has exceeded the upper limit.
● The battery warranty period has expired.

General Requirements

NOTICE

To ensure battery safety and battery management accuracy, use batteries provided
by the Company. The Company is not responsible for any faults of batteries
provided by other vendors.

● Before installing, operating, and maintaining batteries, read the battery


vendor's instructions and comply with their requirements. The safety
precautions specified in this document are highly important and require
special attention. For additional safety precautions, see the instructions
provided by the battery vendors.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 20


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

● Use batteries within the specified temperature range. When the ambient
temperature of the batteries is lower than the allowed range, do not charge
the batteries to prevent internal short circuits caused during low-temperature
charging.
● Do not reversely connect the positive and negative battery terminals.
Otherwise, a battery alarm will be generated and batteries may be damaged.
● Before unpacking batteries, check whether the packaging is intact. Do not use
batteries with damaged packaging. If any damage is found, notify the carrier
and manufacturer immediately.
● In an indoor scenario, you are advised to power on a battery within seven
days after unpacking. If the battery cannot be powered on in time, put it in
the original packing case and place it in a dry indoor environment without
corrosive gas.
● Do not use a damaged battery (such as damage caused when a battery is
dropped, bumped, bulged, or dented on the enclosure), because the damage
may cause electrolyte leakage or flammable gas release. In the case of
electrolyte leakage or structural deformation, contact the installer or
professional O&M personnel immediately to remove or replace the battery.
Do not store the damaged battery near other devices or flammable materials
and keep it away from non-professionals.
● Before working on a battery, ensure that there is no irritating or burning smell
around the battery.
● When installing batteries, do not place installation tools, metal parts, or
sundries on the batteries. After the installation is complete, clean up the
objects on the batteries and the surrounding area.
● If a battery is accidentally exposed to water, do not install it. Move it to a safe
place for isolation and contact technical engineers in a timely manner.
● Check whether the positive and negative battery terminals are grounded
unexpectedly. If so, disconnect the battery terminals from the ground.
● Do not perform welding or grinding work around batteries to prevent fire
caused by electric sparks or arcs.
● If batteries will not be used for a long period of time, store and charge them
according to the battery requirements.
● Do not charge or discharge batteries by using a device that does not comply
with local laws and regulations.
● Keep the battery loop disconnected during installation and maintenance.
● Monitor damaged batteries during storage for signs of smoke, flame,
electrolyte leakage, or heat.
● If a battery is faulty, its surface temperature may be high. Do not touch the
battery to avoid scalds.

Short-Circuit Protection
● When installing and maintaining batteries, wrap the exposed cable terminals
on the batteries with insulation tape.
● Avoid foreign objects (such as conductive objects, screws, and liquids) from
entering a battery, as this may cause short circuits.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 21


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 1 Safety Information

Leakage Handling

NOTICE

Electrolyte overflow may damage the equipment. It will corrode metal parts and
boards, and ultimately damage the boards.

Electrolyte is corrosive and can cause irritation and chemical burns. If you come
into direct contact with the battery electrolyte, do as follows:
● Inhalation: Evacuate from contaminated areas, get fresh air immediately, and
seek immediate medical attention.
● Eye contact: Immediately wash your eyes with water for at least 15 minutes,
do not rub your eyes, and seek immediate medical attention.
● Skin contact: Wash the affected areas immediately with soap and water and
seek immediate medical attention.
● Intake: Seek immediate medical attention.

Recycling
● Dispose of waste batteries in accordance with local laws and regulations. Do
not dispose of batteries as household waste. Improper disposal of batteries
may result in environmental pollution or an explosion.
● If a battery leaks or is damaged, contact technical support or a battery
recycling company for disposal.
● If batteries are out of service life, contact a battery recycling company for
disposal.
● Do not expose waste batteries to high temperatures or direct sunlight.
● Do not place waste batteries in environments with high humidity or corrosive
substances.
● Do not use faulty batteries. Contact a battery recycling company to scrap
them as soon as possible to avoid environmental pollution.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 22


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

2 Installation Preparations

2.1 Transportation and Placement Precautions


Transportation Precautions
● Only trained personnel are allowed to move the equipment. Use a pallet truck
to move the equipment with its case from the transportation truck. The forks
must be properly positioned to ensure that the equipment does not topple.
● Transport equipment by sea or good road. No excessive tilt or jolt is allowed
during transportation. When loading and unloading the equipment, ensure
that the equipment does not tilt over 15 degrees, as shown in Figure 2-1.
● To avoid toppling, use a rope to secure the equipment case to the pallet truck
before moving it, and assign persons to watch out the equipment during
movement.
● Move a cabinet with caution. Bumping or falling may damage the equipment.
● Unpack the equipment after moving it to the installation position. Avoid
damaging the equipment during unpacking. Do not take down the equipment
from the pallet before installation.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 23


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-1 Cabinet tilt angle

Placement Precautions
Place cardboard boxes in sequence based on their numbers.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 24


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-2 Placing components

2.2 Unpacking and Acceptance

Context
Unpack and inspect all cabinets, mechanical parts, and components. Check that all
the items are intact and comply with the packing list in the presence of both the
project supervisor and customer.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 25


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

NOTICE

● Only trained personnel are allowed to move the cabinet. Use a forklift to
remove the packed cabinet from the pallet.
● To prevent the equipment from falling over, secure it to a pallet truck using
ropes before moving it. Move the equipment with caution to avoid bumping or
falling, which may damage the equipment.
● After placing the equipment in the installation position, unpack it and take care
to prevent scratches. Keep the equipment stable during unpacking.
● After unpacking, check whether the fastening components and removable
components are loose. If they are loose, notify the carrier and manufacturer
immediately.
● If the installation environment is poor, take dustproof and anti-condensation
measures (for example, use a dust cover, plastic film, or fabric cloth) after
unpacking the equipment to prevent condensation and dust buildup, which
may corrode the equipment.

Procedure
Step 1 Unpack the carton labeled Contain Packing List and take out the Packing List.

Step 2 Check all items against the Packing List.

Step 3 If an item is incorrect and missing, contact the supplier.

Step 4 If any item is damaged, fill in the Cargo Replacement Application Form and report
it.

Step 5 Sign on the Packing List with the customer after verifying that all required items
are delivered.

Step 6 Store the items properly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
● Put the items to be installed immediately onto an ESD surface, such as a
polyethylene (PE) bag or an expandable polyethylene (EPE) foam.
● Pack the items not to be installed immediately with their original packing
materials. Put them in a dry and cool environment without exposure to
sunlight or sources of strong electromagnetic radiation.

2.3 Installation Environment Check


Ensure that the installation environment meets the requirements before
installation.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 26


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Table 2-1 Installation environment checklist


Item Required Specifications Check Result

Floor load- ● Standard live load of the main □ Passed □ Failed


bearing capacity equipment room: 8–12 kN/m2
(If the battery cabinet is placed
inside the module, use the
standard live load of the main
equipment room as a reference.)
● Hanging load of the main
equipment room: 1.2 kN/m2
● Standard live load of the
uninterruptible power system
(UPS) room: 8–10 kN/m2
● Standard live load of the battery
room: 16 kN/m2
● Standard live load of the
monitoring center: 6 kN/m2

Equipment room ● Non-smart-busbar power □ Passed □ Failed


net height distribution scenario: ≥ 2.6 m
(without bases) ● Top support installation scenario
for the smart busbar:
– Single-layer smart busbar
power distribution scenario: ≥
2.8 m
– Dual-layer smart busbar
power distribution scenario: ≥
3.0 m
● Smart busbar hoisting scenario:
– Single-layer smart busbar
power distribution scenario: ≥
2.8 m
– Dual-layer smart busbar
power distribution scenario: ≥
3.5 m
NOTICE
Equipment room net height (with
bases) = Equipment room net height
(without bases) + Base height

Height and width Height ≥ 2.2 m and width ≥ 1.2 m □ Passed □ Failed
of the equipment (If a 2200 mm high cabinet cannot
aisle and door go through, tilt the cabinet.)

Floor levelness Allowed deviation: ±3 mm/2000 □ Passed □ Failed


mm

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 27


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Item Required Specifications Check Result

Elevator ● Elevator bearing capacity: > 1.5 t □ Passed □ Failed


● Internal elevator size: height >
2.4 m or depth > 2.7 m

Cable tray Cable trays are preinstalled in the □ Passed □ Failed


equipment room for routing signal
cables and power cables.

Power 380–415 V AC (±10%); 3 Ph; 50 □ Passed □ Failed


Hz/60 Hz

Fire extinguishing Indoor gas-extinguishing system □ Passed □ Failed

Floor drain DN50 or larger, made of cast iron □ Passed □ Failed


or stainless steel

Module ● The equipment room grounding □ Passed □ Failed


grounding system must be a TN-S or TN-C-
S system.
● The equipment room ground
grid has a ground resistance no
greater than 10 ohms. (If the
ground resistance exceeds 10
ohms, ensure that the
equivalent ground radius of the
ground grid exceeds 5 meters.)
● Ground bars are deployed over
the cable tray or under the
raised floor.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 28


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Item Required Specifications Check Result

Monitoring port ● One LAN switch Ethernet port: □ Passed □ Failed


connects to the customer subnet
to monitor devices inside the
module.
● (Optional) Two fire control dry
contacts (access actuator and
PDF fire control terminals):
connect to the fire extinguishing
system of the equipment room.
● (Optional) SIM card: supports
the 4G module. The collector
supports short message service
(SMS) and 4G communication
(including full frequency), is
compatible with 3G (WCDMA)
and 2G (GSM) communication,
and provides a standard SIM
card slot. If the collector
supports the SMS alarm
function, configure a SIM card.
NOTE
If there are multiple modules,
configure a collector for each
module. For the collectors that
support the SMS alarm function,
configure a SIM card for each
collector.
● IP address: Each of collectors
and cameras requires an IP
address respectively.

NOTE

If the requirements are not met, contact technical support.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 29


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

2.4 Field Requirements


Figure 2-3 Dual-row scenario

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 30


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-4 Smart module dimensions (unit: mm)

Table 2-2 Smart module height specifications

Config. Smart Module Height

2 m cabinets Skylights closed Cabinet + Control skylight height: 2395


mm; aisle door height: 2410 mm

Skylights opened 2530 mm

Single-layer Skylights closed: 2330 mm; skylights


smart busbars opened: 2530 mm
deployed

Dual-layer smart 2700 mm


busbars deployed

2.2 m cabinets Skylights closed Cabinet + Control skylight height: 2595


mm; aisle door height: 2610 mm

Skylights opened 2730 mm

Single-layer Skylights closed: 2530 mm; skylights


smart busbars opened: 2730 mm
deployed

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 31


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Config. Smart Module Height

Dual-layer smart 2900 mm


busbars deployed

2.5 Reference Documentation


● Before installation, prepare the following documents in addition to this
document.
● You can log in to https://support.huawei.com or https://
support.huawei.com/enterprise and search for the documents listed in Table
2-3.

Table 2-3 Reference documents


System Component Document
Category

Power Precision PDF PDU8000 Modular Precision Power


supply and Distribution Frame V2.0 User Manual
distribution
system Integrated PDF PDU8000 Modular Integrated PDC V1.0
User Manual
Integrated UPS UPS5000-E-(60 kVA–125 kVA) User Manual
(Integrated UPS 3.0)
UPS5000-E-(30 kVA–180 kVA) User Manual
(Integrated UPS)
UPS5000-E-180 kVA User Manual
(Integrated UPS, 60 kVA Power Modules)
SmartLi SmartLi 3.0 User Manual (Long-Term
Backup Power)
Smart busbar NMW Smart Busbar 2.0 User Manual
NMW Smart Busbar 2.1 User Manual
Smart cooling PDU8000 Power Distribution Box-T Quick
product PDB Guide (02405344)
Lead-acid battery Battery Cabinet Battery Cable Connection
cabinet Quick Guide
Cooling NetCol5000-A(025, NetCol5000-A(025, 035) In-row Air Cooled
system 035) in-row air Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide (300
cooled smart mm Width)
cooling product

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 32


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

System Component Document


Category

NetCol5000-A050 NetCol5000-A050 In-row Air Cooled Smart


in-row air cooled Cooling Product Quick Guide
smart cooling
product

FusionCol5000-A065 FusionCol5000-A065 In-row Air Cooled


in-row air cooled Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide
smart cooling
product

FusionCol5000-A050 FusionCol5000-A050 In-row Air Cooled


in-row air cooled Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide
smart cooling
product

Facility ECC800-Pro ECC800-Pro Data Center Controller User


manageme Manual
nt system NOTE
Log in to the technical support website, search
for ECC800-Pro Data Center Controller User
Manual, and select the product documentation
of the required version.

NetEco (For Customer) iMaster NetEco Product


Documentation (Data Center)
NOTE
Log in to the technical support website, search
for (For Customer) iMaster NetEco Product
Documentation (Data Center), and select the
product documentation of the required version.

Others - FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular


Data Center Quick Guide includes the
following documents:
● FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular
Data Center Installation Quick Start
● FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular
Data Center Cable Routing Diagram for
a Dual-Row Aisle Containment
● FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular
Data Center Management System
Wiring Diagram
Cable tray Indoor Cable Tray Installation Guide
Base FusionModule2000 Smart Modular Data
Center Cabinet Base Design Diagram

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 33


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

NOTE

The ECC800-Pro/NetEco version depends on the version in use. Click on the ECC800-Pro/
NetEco WebUI to obtain the current version.

2.6 Tools to Be Prepared Onsite

2.6.1 Tools Delivered with Equipment


Marking-off Template
A marking-off template is used for drawing lines to determine an installation
position. The marking-off template is available in the No. 0 package.

Figure 2-5 Marking-off template for a 1200 mm deep cabinet

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 34


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Figure 2-6 Usage of marking-off templates

(A) Properly located cabinet (B) Marking-off template edgefolds

Aisle Check Tool


Aisle check tool dimension description:

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 35


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

● Longer-side length: Check whether the distance between the cabinet frames
in two rows of cabinets is 1250 mm.
● Shorter-side length: Check whether the distance between the doors in two
rows of cabinets is 1200 mm.

NOTICE

When checking the height, ensure that the floor levelness meets engineering
requirements (floor levelness tolerance: ±3 mm/2000 mm).

Figure 2-7 Aisle check tool

2.6.2 Tools and Instruments

This section lists the tools and instruments required for installation.

Table 2-4 General tools

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Protective gloves Marker Steel measuring Level


tape

Insulated ladder Phillips insulated Phase-sequence Flat-head


torque meter insulated torque
screwdriver screwdriver
(M6/M8) (M6/M8)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 36


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Adjustable torque Insulated torque Hex key Torx key


wrench socket wrench
(M6/M8)

Adjustable wrench Combination Cotton cloth Labels


wrench

Electric Hand drill Hammer drill Heat gun


screwdriver

Laser level Utility knife Electrician's knife Impact tool

Insulation tape Needle-nose Diagonal pliers RJ45 crimping


pliers tool

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 37


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Crimping tool Wire stripper Hydraulic pliers Wire clippers

Cable tie Multimeter Electroprobe Brush

Claw hammer Vacuum cleaner Hacksaw Foldable saw

Square Heat shrink Network tester Rubber mallet


tubing

Flashlight Clamp meter Vacuum pump Rubber hose

Pressure gauge Reducing valve Nitrogen Electric balance

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 38


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

- - -

Thermocouple
temperature
sensor
NOTE
This table may not list some tools required at specific sites. Onsite installation personnel
and technical support personnel should prepare tools based on site requirements.

Table 2-5 Transportation and unpacking tools

Name, Specifications, and Appearance

Manual pallet Lever (bearing


Diesel forklift Hoisting rope
truck capacity ≥ 400 kg)
(bearing capacity
≥ 400 kg)

2.7 Construction Personnel Requirements


Only trained and qualified personnel who fully understand basic safety
precautions are allowed to perform the installation and operation.

CAUTION

The relevant party will be liable for any consequence caused by the violation of
this document.

The construction personnel requirements are as follows:

● Technical personnel from the customer must be trained and understand the
installation and operation methods.
● The number of installation personnel varies depending on the project progress
and the installation environment. Typically, three to five persons are required.
● People who need to work at heights must have the required work permit.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 39


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

2.8 Scenario Description

NOTICE

● The floor plan and exterior diagrams only indicate the relative positions of
components. For the detailed installation position, see the onsite engineering
layout diagram and actual components.
● The PDF in smart module A is an integrated UPS, and lead-acid batteries are
deployed inside the smart module.
● The PDF in smart module B is a precision PDF, and the UPS and lithium or lead-
acid batteries are not deployed inside the smart module.
● The PDF in smart module A (lithium or lead-acid batteries deployed outside the
smart module) is an integrated UPS, and lithium or lead-acid batteries are not
deployed inside the smart module.
● It is recommended that two smart cooling products with heating and
humidification functions be provided in standard configuration. In a dual-row
aisle containment, the smart cooling products with heating and humidification
functions should be deployed diagonally. If more smart cooling products with
heating and humidification functions are required, deploy them evenly based
on site requirements.

2.8.1 Power Supply and Distribution Cabinet Scenario


Figure 2-8 Layout of dual-row aisle containment

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 40


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 2 Installation Preparations

2.8.2 Smart Busbar Scenario


Figure 2-9 Floor plan of the dual-row aisle containment

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 41


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 3 Smart Module Layout Requirements

3 Smart Module Layout Requirements

3.1 Layout Requirements for Standard Dual-Row Aisle


Containment
Prerequisites
The floor levelness meets engineering requirements (levelness tolerance: ±3 mm/
2000 mm).

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the installation position for the smart module based on the onsite
engineering layout diagram.
Step 2 Use a laser locator to mark two lines that are perpendicular to each other in a
corner of the planned installation position.
NOTE

If no laser locator is available, use an angle ruler and thin rope to mark the two
perpendicular lines.

Step 3 Place one corner of the marking-off template at the crossing point of the
perpendicular lines to determine the position for an end cabinet. Use a marker to
mark the outline of the marking-off template and the mounting holes for the
cabinet on the floor.

NOTICE

If there is no need to secure the cabinet to the floor, mark only the outline of the
marking-off template.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 42


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 3 Smart Module Layout Requirements

Figure 3-1 Using a laser locator for positioning (dual-row aisle containment)

(1) Marking-off template (2) Aisle containment (3) Laser locator

Step 4 Use a measuring tape to measure the aisle distance and mark the position for the
end cabinet in the other row in the same way.

----End

3.2 Layout Requirements for Dual-Row Aisle


Containment with a Column
This section describes the column position in the scenario with a column relative
to the adjustable skylight, enclosure plates, and cable trays.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 43


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 3 Smart Module Layout Requirements

Figure 3-2 Legend

(1) Cabinet (2) Single-layer cable tray (3) Double-layer cable tray

(4) Flat or rotating skylight (5) Adjustable skylight (6) Enclosure plate

(7) Column in the data center

NOTICE

If a column in the data center is irregular, ensure that the largest cross section of
the column does not interfere with cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 44


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 3 Smart Module Layout Requirements

Figure 3-3 Column in the aisle containment (A < 800 mm)

NOTE

● Reserve the cabinet places on both sides of the column vacant and seal with enclosure
plates. Directions of the concave sides of the enclosure plates are shown in Figure 3-3.
● Install cable trays over the cabinets on both sides of the reserved cabinet places for routing
electrical and ELV cables.
● Install an adjustable skylight on the top of the aisle containment. The adjustable skylight
should cover the area shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-4 Column occupying part of a cabinet place (A < 800 mm, B ≥ 800 mm,
and C ≥ 40 mm)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 45


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 3 Smart Module Layout Requirements

NOTE

● Reserve the cabinet places on both sides of the column vacant and seal with enclosure
plates. Directions of the concave sides of the enclosure plates are shown in Figure 3-4.
● Install cable trays over the cabinets on both sides of the reserved cabinet places for routing
electrical and ELV cables.
● Install an adjustable skylight on the top of the aisle containment. The adjustable skylight
should cover the area shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-5 Column occupying part of a cabinet place (A ≥ 800 mm, B ≥ 400 mm,
and C ≥ 40 mm)

NOTE

● Reserve the cabinet places on both sides of the column vacant and seal with enclosure
plates. Directions of the concave sides of the enclosure plates are shown in Figure 3-5.
● Install cable trays over the cabinets on both sides of the reserved cabinet places. If the cable
trays cannot be installed in parallel, install them on different layers, the upper for routing
ELV cables while the lower for routing electrical cables.
● Install an adjustable skylight on the top of the aisle containment. The adjustable skylight
should cover the area shown in Figure 3-5.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 46


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 3 Smart Module Layout Requirements

Figure 3-6 Column in a row of cabinets (A < 70 mm, B ≥ 400 mm, and C ≥ 40
mm)

NOTE

● Reserve the cabinet places on one side of the column vacant and seal with enclosure plates.
Directions of the concave sides of the enclosure plates are shown in Figure 3-6.
● Install cable trays over the cabinets on both sides of the reserved cabinet places. If the cable
trays cannot be installed in parallel, install them on different layers, the upper for routing
ELV cables while the lower for routing electrical cables.
● Install an adjustable skylight on the top of the aisle containment. The adjustable skylight
should cover the area shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-7 Column in a row of cabinets (A ≥ 400 mm, B ≥ 0 mm, and C ≥ 40 mm)

NOTE

Seal both sides of the column using enclosure plates. Figure 3-7 shows the directions of the
concave sides of the enclosure plates.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 47


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 3 Smart Module Layout Requirements

Figure 3-8 Column in a row of cabinets (A ≥ 400 mm)

NOTE

● Install cable trays over the cabinets on both sides of the reserved cabinet places. If the cable
trays cannot be installed in parallel, install them on different layers, the upper for routing
ELV cables while the lower for routing electrical cables.
● Install flat or rotating skylights on the top of the aisle containment.
● If enclosure plates cannot be installed on both sides of the column, install enclosure plates
only near the aisle containment.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 48


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 4 (Optional) Installing Bases

4 (Optional) Installing Bases

4.1 Precautions for Installing Bases


To ensure that bases fit cabinet connecting structures, configure bases with
different specifications for different cabinets. For the detailed dimensions of bases,
see the installation diagrams and parameter manual.
● If there are bases, install the smart cooling products first.
● If there are no bases, install cabinets from the end cabinet in sequence.

NOTICE

If you do not use the bases provided by the Company, determine the bearing
requirements for bases according to the service plan.

● The load-bearing capacity of the bases shall be greater than or equal to 2.5
tons.
● Assume that each row of cabinets is configured with N bases:
– If N is less than 5, you can install all the bases at a time. After
installation, check that the total length of each row of bases is the sum
of nominal widths of all bases (tolerance: –3 mm to 0 mm).
– If N is greater than or equal to 5, you are advised to install five bases at a
time. After installation, check that the total length of the bases is the
sum of nominal widths of all bases (tolerance: –3 mm to 0 mm). After
installing five bases, check whether the total length of the five bases and
the diagonal length differences meet the requirements.
If the length and differences meet the requirements, tighten the bolts
and continue to install next five bases. If the length and differences do
not meet the requirements, adjust the bases to meet the requirements
before tightening the bolts to prevent bases secured in a parallelogram or
trapezoid shape.
● To ensure accurate locations, you are advised to determine base locations
using a laser locator before the installation.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 49


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 4 (Optional) Installing Bases

● |L1–L2| ≤ 5 mm, |L3–L4| ≤ 5 mm

Figure 4-1 Single-row base layout (unit: mm)

Figure 4-2 Dual-row base layout (unit: mm)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 50


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 5 Installing the PDF

5 Installing the PDF

5.1 Moving the PDF


Context

NOTICE

● Only trained personnel are allowed to move the power distribution frame
(PDF). Use a forklift truck to transport the PDF case secured to a wooden pallet
to the installation position.
● To prevent the PDF from falling over, secure the PDF case to the forklift truck
using ropes before moving it.
● Move the PDF with caution to avoid bumping or toppling, which may damage
the PDF. After placing the PDF case in the installation position, unpack it with
care to avoid scratches. Keep the PDF steady during unpacking.
● If the PDF installation environment is in poor condition, take anti-dust
measures to store the PDF after it is unpacked. It is recommended that you
wrap the PDF with the original plastic cover.

Preparations
Tools: forklift truck, adjustable wrench, diagonal pliers
Materials: PDF and accessories, sliding plate
Document: cabinet layout diagram
Skill requirement: forklift driver, common technician

Procedure
Step 1 Check whether the PDF packing is intact.
Step 2 Cut off and remove the binding straps, and remove the packing.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 51


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 5 Installing the PDF

Step 3 Remove the plastic bag and take out the fitting box and sliding plates.
Step 4 Check whether the PDF is intact.
1. Check the exterior of the PDF and check whether the PDF is damaged during
transportation. If any damage is found, notify the carrier immediately.
2. Check that the fittings comply with the packing list. If there is any
discrepancy, keep a record and contact the supplier immediately.
Step 5 After verifying that the PDF is intact, remove the L-shaped brackets securing the
cabinet and pallet, and insert the two sliding plates under the pallet.
NOTE

Ensure that the sliding plates are properly installed in step (2) in Figure 5-1; otherwise, the
sliding plates may shift when the PDF is unloaded.

Figure 5-1 Removing L-shaped brackets

Step 6 Raise the four leveling feet to the highest position using an adjustable wrench.

NOTICE

When raising the leveling feet, at least one person is required to hold the cabinet
to prevent it from sliding.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 52


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 5 Installing the PDF

Figure 5-2 Raising the leveling feet

Step 7 Move the PDF over its castors to the installation position.
NOTE

If there is a base, place the PDF on the base.

----End

5.2 Installing an Enclosure Frame


For details, see the document delivered with the PDF.

5.3 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame


Context
In 2200 mm scenarios, a top frame is used to increase the cabinet height by 200
mm.

NOTE

This top frame applies only to the PDFs (including the integrated PDF, precision PDF, and
integrated UPS) at both ends of the aisle.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 53


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 5 Installing the PDF

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Material: top frame

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M5x10 tapping screws that secure the front door sealing plate on
the top of the cabinet, as shown by (1) in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Installing a top frame

Step 2 Place the top frame, the side with FRONT facing upwards and the end near
FRONT facing the cabinet front door, as shown by (2) in Figure 5-3.
Step 3 Secure the top frame.
1. Use four M8x20 screw assemblies to secure the top frame to the cabinet, as
shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 5-3.
2. Install two M5x10 tapping screws at the front of the top frame to set up
equipotential bonding between the cabinet and the top frame, as shown by
(3) in Figure 5-3.

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 54


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT


Cabinets, and Battery Cabinets

6.1 Moving Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and Battery


Cabinets

Preparations
Tool: adjustable wrench

Procedure
Step 1 Move the cabinet to the planned installation position.
Step 2 Remove the bolts that secure the cabinet to the pallet.
NOTE

If the cabinet needs to be secured, save the bolts removed from the pallet for future use.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 55


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

Figure 6-1 Removing bolts

Step 3 Remove the cabinet from the pallet and place the cabinet in the installation
position.
NOTE

If there is a base, place the cabinet on the base.

----End

6.2 (Optional) Installing Side Panels for IT Cabinets


Context
If an IT cabinet is not equipped with side panels and placed in the end position,
side panels need to be installed to ensure that the outer side of an end cabinet
has side panels.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver
Material: side panel

Procedure
Step 1 Mark the mounting hole positions for the end cabinet based on the mounting
holes in the cabinet side panel, and install the floating nuts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 56


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

Figure 6-2 Installing floating nuts

Step 2 (Optional) Remove side panels as required.


Step 3 Secure the side panels to the outside of the IT cabinet at the end of the row.
NOTE

Install two side panels for each end cabinet, one in the upper part and the other in the lower
part.

Figure 6-3 Installing a cabinet side panel

Step 4 (Optional) After adjusting side panels, remove the labels on the panels.

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 57


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

6.3 (Optional) Taking Out rPDU Cables


Preparations
Tool: diagonal pliers

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the rodent-proof mesh on the top of the rPDU in a cabinet, and take out
the rPDU cables from the top.
Step 2 Lay out the rPDU cables on the cabinet top, and reinstall the rodent-proof mesh.

NOTICE

● Cut the rodent-proof mesh based on the cable thickness using diagonal pliers
and other tools. If the opening is too large, foreign matter may fall into the
cabinet through the opening.
● Flatten the rodent-proof mesh if it is tilted after cables are routed.

Figure 6-4 Tailoring the rodent-proof mesh

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Before connecting the power plug of a device to the rPDU, loosen the locking
device on the rPDU. After connecting the power plug, tighten the locking device.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 58


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

6.4 (Optional) Taking Out Industrial Connectors


Prerequisites
The rPDUs are equipped with industrial connectors.

Preparations
Tool: diagonal pliers

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the rodent-proof mesh on the top of the rPDU in a cabinet, and take out
the two industrial connectors from the top.

Step 2 Lay out the industrial connectors and cables on the cabinet top, and reinstall the
rodent-proof mesh.

NOTICE

● Cut the rodent-proof mesh based on the cable thickness using diagonal pliers
and other tools. If the opening is too large, foreign matter may fall into the
cabinet through the opening.
● Flatten the rodent-proof mesh if it is tilted after cables are routed.

Figure 6-5 Tailoring the rodent-proof mesh

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Before connecting the power plug of a device to the rPDU, loosen the locking
device on the rPDU. After connecting the power plug, tighten the locking device.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 59


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

6.5 (Optional) Adjusting a Battery Cabinet Side Panel


If an auxiliary battery cabinet (without a circuit breaker) is deployed in the smart
module, remove the panel on one side of the main battery cabinet and install the
side panel on the outer side of the auxiliary cabinet based on the label on the
main battery cabinet. Ensure that there are side panels on the outer sides of the
main and auxiliary battery cabinets and there is no side panel between the
adjacent battery cabinets.

NOTE

After adjusting the side panel of the battery cabinet, remove the label which indicates side
panel adjustment from the main battery cabinet.

6.6 (Optional) Installing a Battery Cabinet Top Frame


Context
In 2200 mm scenarios, a top frame is used to increase the cabinet height by 200
mm.

NOTE

This top frame applies only to the PDFs (including the integrated PDF, precision PDF, and
integrated UPS) at both ends of the aisle.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Material: top frame

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M5x10 tapping screws that secure the front door sealing plate on
the top of the cabinet, as shown by (1) in Figure 6-6.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 60


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

Figure 6-6 Installing a top frame

Step 2 Place the top frame, the side with FRONT facing upwards and the end near
FRONT facing the cabinet front door, as shown by (2) in Figure 6-6.
Step 3 Secure the top frame.
1. Use four M8x20 screw assemblies to secure the top frame to the cabinet, as
shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 6-6.
2. Install two M5x10 tapping screws at the front of the top frame to set up
equipotential bonding between the cabinet and the top frame, as shown by
(3) in Figure 6-6.

----End

6.7 (Optional) Installing a Horizontal Ground Bar


Context
Install one horizontal ground bar with the BOM number of 21170398 inside the
battery cabinet or IT cabinet closest to the PDF for each row of cabinets.

Preparations
Tools: adjustable wrench, torque wrench
Material: horizontal ground bar

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M8 screws from the horizontal ground bar.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 61


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

Figure 6-7 Removing M8 screws

Step 2 Open the cabinet rear door, install the horizontal ground bar on the topmost
position on the outside of the mounting bar, and secure the ground bar using the
M8 screws removed earlier.
NOTE

Install the horizontal ground bar in the battery cabinet or IT cabinet adjacent to the PDF.

Figure 6-8 Installing a horizontal ground bar

Step 3 Connect the copper bar ground cable.

Figure 6-9 Copper bar grounding

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 62


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 6 Installing Network Cabinets, IT Cabinets, and
Installation Guide Battery Cabinets

6.8 (Optional) Installing a Vertical Ground Bar


Context
Install a vertical ground bar in the IT cabinet that is closest to the PDF. The BOM
number of the vertical ground bar is 21241363.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Material: vertical ground bar

Procedure
Step 1 Open the cabinet rear door and use four M4 screws to secure the vertical ground
bar to the right mounting bar.
NOTE

The specific securing positions are the screw holes in the middle of the 04 U, 14 U, 29 U, and 39
U positions.

Figure 6-10 Installing a vertical ground bar

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 63


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

7.1 Installing NetCol5000-A(025, 035) Smart Cooling


Products
For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or NetCol5000-A(025, 035) In-row Air Cooled
Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide (300 mm Width).

7.1.1 (Optional) Installing an Enclosure Frame

Procedure
Step 1 Open the front door, and remove the LCD cables and front door ground cable.
Then lift and remove the front door.
NOTE

Install an enclosure frame on the front door side.

Step 2 Remove one bolt fastener, two cabinet connecting kits, and two hinges.
Step 3 Secure the enclosure frame to the front door frame using eight M5x10 tapping
screws, and secure the bolt fastener, cabinet connecting kits, and hinges to the
enclosure frame.
Step 4 Pull the LCD signal cable to ensure that the door can be smoothly opened and
closed, install the LCD signal cable, put back the NTC cable, and connect the
ground cable under the front door to the ground position marked on the
enclosure frame.
Step 5 Secure the LCD and NTC cables to the original positions using cable ties, and
install the front door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 64


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

Figure 7-1 Installing an enclosure frame

----End

7.1.2 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Top Pipe Routing)


Prerequisites
If a cabinet is 2200 mm high, install a top frame after installing enclosure frames
of the smart cooling product.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M5x10 tapping screws that secure the front door sealing plate on
the top of the cabinet, as shown by (1) in Figure 7-2.
Step 2 Remove the rear decorative plate for the top frame, remove the four M5x10
tapping screws and the six M4x10 countersunk screws from the rear plate of the
top frame, as shown by (2) and (3) in Figure 7-2, and remove the rear plate.
Step 3 Place the top frame with the side marked FRONT facing upwards and ensure that
this end faces the front door of the cabinet, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-2.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 65


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

Figure 7-2 Placing a top frame

Step 4 Secure the top frame.


1. Use four M5x10 tapping screws and six M4x10 countersunk screws to secure
the rear plate to the top frame, and clamp the rear decorative plate, as shown
by (1) and (2) in Figure 7-3.
2. Use four M8x20 screw assemblies to secure the top frame to the cabinet, as
shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 7-3.
3. Install two M5x10 tapping screws at the front of the top frame to set up
equipotential bonding between the cabinet and the top frame, as shown by
(3) in Figure 7-3.

Figure 7-3 Securing the top frame

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 66


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

7.1.3 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Bottom Pipe Routing)

Prerequisites
If a cabinet is 2200 mm high, install a top frame after installing an enclosure
frame for the smart cooling product.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Material: top frame

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M5x10 tapping screws that secure the front door sealing plate on
the top of the cabinet, as shown by (1) in Figure 7-4.

Step 2 Place the top frame with the side marked FRONT facing upwards and ensure that
this end faces the front door of the cabinet, as shown by (2) in Figure 7-4.

Step 3 Secure the top frame.


1. Use four M8x20 screw assemblies to secure the top frame to the cabinet, as
shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 7-4.
2. Install two M5x10 tapping screws at the front of the top frame to set up
equipotential bonding between the cabinet and the top frame, as shown by
(3) in Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Installing a top frame

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 67


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

7.1.4 (Optional) Installing an Adaptive Frame for a 300 mm


Wide Smart Cooling Product
Context
● If an odd number of 300 mm wide smart cooling products are installed, an
adaptive frame should be installed so that the lengths of the two cabinet
rows are the same. The BOM number of an adaptive frame for smart cooling
products is 21242047.
● An adaptive frame consists of a front panel, a rear panel, and a top panel. The
front panel and rear panel are the same.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: front panel, rear panel, top panel, connecting kit

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) If the cabinet depth is 1200 mm, use three M4x10 screw assemblies to
assemble the top panel.

Figure 7-5 Assembling a top panel

Step 2 Use M4x10 screw assemblies to secure connecting kits to the front and rear
panels.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 68


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

Figure 7-6 Installing connecting kits

Step 3 Clamp the front panel between cabinets and ensure that its front surface is flush
with the cabinet doors. Use connecting kits and M4x10 screw assemblies to
connect the front panel to the adjacent cabinet.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 69


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

Figure 7-7 Securing an adaptive frame

Step 4 Install the rear panel in the same way.


Step 5 Use four M4x10 screw assemblies to secure the top panel to the front and rear
panels, as shown by (1) in Figure 7-8.

NOTICE

Do not over-tighten the top panel of the adaptive frame. Otherwise, the top panel
will be uneven.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 70


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

Figure 7-8 Securing a top panel

Step 6 Use four M5x10 tapping screws to secure the top panel to the adjacent cabinets,
as shown by (2) in Figure 7-8.

----End

7.1.5 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame for an Adaptive Frame


Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Material: top frame for an adaptive frame

Procedure
Step 1 Place the top frame and ensure that the side with FRONT faces upwards toward
the front of the adaptive frame.
Step 2 Use screw assemblies to secure the top frame to the adaptive frame.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 71


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

Figure 7-9 Installing a top frame

----End

7.2 Installing NetCol5000-A050 Smart Cooling Products


For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or NetCol5000-A050 In-row Air Cooled Smart
Cooling Product Quick Guide.

7.2.1 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Top Pipe Routing)


Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M5x10 tapping screws that secure the front door sealing plate on
the top of the cabinet, as shown by (1) in Figure 7-10.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 72


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

Figure 7-10 Placing a top frame

Step 2 Remove the rear decorative plate for the top frame, remove the four M5x10
tapping screws and the six M4x10 countersunk screws from the rear plate of the
top frame, as shown by (2) and (3) in Figure 7-10, and remove the rear plate.
Step 3 Place the top frame with the side marked FRONT facing upwards and ensure that
this end faces the front door of the cabinet, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-10.
Step 4 Secure the top frame.
1. Use four M5x10 tapping screws and six M4x10 countersunk screws to secure
the rear plate to the top frame, and clamp the rear decorative plate, as shown
by (1) and (2) in Figure 7-11.

Figure 7-11 Securing the top frame

2. Use four M8x20 screw assemblies to secure the top frame to the cabinet, as
shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 7-11.
3. Install two M5x10 tapping screws at the front of the top frame to set up
equipotential bonding between the cabinet and the top frame, as shown by
(3) in Figure 7-11.
----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 73


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

7.2.2 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Bottom Pipe Routing)


In the scenario where smart cooling product pipes are routed from the bottom,
the top frame is installed in the same way as the top frame of a PDF. For details,
see section "Installing a Top Frame" in chapter "Installing the PDF."

7.3 Installing FusionCol5000-A065 Smart Cooling


Products
For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or FusionCol5000-A065 In-row Air Cooled
Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide.

7.3.1 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Top Pipe Routing)

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M5x10 tapping screws that secure the front door sealing plate on
the top of the cabinet, as shown by (1) in Figure 7-12.

Figure 7-12 Placing a top frame

Step 2 Remove the rear decorative plate for the top frame, remove the four M5x10
tapping screws and the six M4x10 countersunk screws from the rear plate of the
top frame, as shown by (2) and (3) in Figure 7-12, and remove the rear plate.

Step 3 Place the top frame with the side marked FRONT facing upwards and ensure that
this end faces the front door of the cabinet, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-12.

Step 4 Secure the top frame.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 74


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

1. Use four M5x10 tapping screws and six M4x10 countersunk screws to secure
the rear plate to the top frame, and clamp the rear decorative plate, as shown
by (1) and (2) in Figure 7-13.

Figure 7-13 Securing the top frame

2. Use four M8x20 screw assemblies to secure the top frame to the cabinet, as
shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 7-13.
3. Install two M5x10 tapping screws at the front of the top frame to set up
equipotential bonding between the cabinet and the top frame, as shown by
(3) in Figure 7-13.

----End

7.3.2 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Bottom Pipe Routing)


In the scenario where smart cooling product pipes are routed from the bottom,
the top frame is installed in the same way as the top frame of a PDF. For details,
see section "Installing a Top Frame" in chapter "Installing the PDF."

7.4 Installing FusionCol5000-A050 Smart Cooling


Products
For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or FusionCol5000-A050 In-row Air Cooled
Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide.

7.4.1 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Top Pipe Routing)


Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 75


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the two M5x10 tapping screws that secure the front door sealing plate on
the top of the cabinet, as shown by (1) in Figure 7-14.

Figure 7-14 Placing a top frame

Step 2 Remove the rear decorative plate for the top frame, remove the four M5x10
tapping screws and the six M4x10 countersunk screws from the rear plate of the
top frame, as shown by (2) and (3) in Figure 7-14, and remove the rear plate.

Step 3 Place the top frame with the side marked FRONT facing upwards and ensure that
this end faces the front door of the cabinet, as shown by (4) in Figure 7-14.

Step 4 Secure the top frame.


1. Use four M5x10 tapping screws and six M4x10 countersunk screws to secure
the rear plate to the top frame, and clamp the rear decorative plate, as shown
by (1) and (2) in Figure 7-15.

Figure 7-15 Securing the top frame

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 76


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 7 Installing Smart Cooling Products

2. Use four M8x20 screw assemblies to secure the top frame to the cabinet, as
shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 7-15.
3. Install two M5x10 tapping screws at the front of the top frame to set up
equipotential bonding between the cabinet and the top frame, as shown by
(3) in Figure 7-15.

----End

7.4.2 (Optional) Installing a Top Frame (Bottom Pipe Routing)


In the scenario where smart cooling product pipes are routed from the bottom,
the top frame is installed in the same way as the top frame of a PDF. For details,
see section "Installing a Top Frame" in chapter "Installing the PDF."

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 77


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 8 Combining Cabinets

8 Combining Cabinets

Precautions for Combining Cabinets


To ensure that the dimensions of the combined cabinets are correct and prevent
the accumulated tolerance from affecting the installation of upper-layer
components, keep the total length deviation of the combined cabinets in the
allowed range. Ensure that the nominal size L of every five combined cabinets is in
the deviation of –7.5 mm to 0 mm.

NOTICE

● During the installation, you are advised to use a laser locator to ensure
accurate positioning.
● Partially tighten the screws during cabinet combination. After the installation
positions are adjusted properly, tighten the screws to the required torque.

● Assume that there are N cabinets in a row in the module. After combining the
cabinets, ensure that the total length of the cabinets in a row is the sum of
the nominal widths of all the cabinets (tolerance: –7.5 mm to 0 mm).
a. If N is less than or equal to 5, you can combine the cabinets at a time.
After combining the cabinets, ensure that the total length of the cabinets
in a row is the sum of the nominal widths of all the cabinets (tolerance: –
7.5 mm to 0 mm).
b. If N is greater than 5, you are advised to combine every five cabinets as a
group. After the cabinets are combined, check whether the total length is
the sum of nominal widths of all cabinets (tolerance: –7.5 mm to 0 mm).
– Every time five cabinets are combined, check whether the total width of
the five cabinets meets the tolerance requirement.
– If the requirement is met, tighten the bolts and continue to install other
five cabinets. If the requirement is not met, adjust the cabinets and then
tighten the bolts. The cabinets cannot be moved after being secured. If
the width difference is excessive after the cabinets are installed, the
upper-layer components cannot be installed.
● To ensure accurate positioning, you are advised to use a laser locator to
determine the cabinet locations and then adjust the cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 78


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 8 Combining Cabinets

● After cabinets are combined, the total length of the cabinets in a row is as
follows: L = 5 x W (–7.5 mm to 0 mm). W is the nominal width of a group of
cabinets.

Figure 8-1 Combined cabinets

Prerequisites
If there are bases, the bases are leveled and cabinets are placed on the bases.

Preparations
Tools: socket wrench, level, insulated Phillips screwdriver
Document: cabinet layout diagram

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Partially secure the cabinets to the bases.
NOTE

● If bases are required, perform this step for the PDF, network cabinet, IT cabinet, 600 mm
wide smart cooling product, and 300 mm wide smart cooling product with castors.
● If bases are required, go to Step 4 for cabinets without castors.

1. Align the mounting holes on the cabinet with those on the base.
2. Insert M12x80 screw assemblies into the mounting holes for the cabinet and
base, and partially tighten the screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 79


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 8 Combining Cabinets

Figure 8-2 Partially securing the cabinet to its base

Step 2 Level the cabinets and ensure that the height deviation is 2000 mm/2200 mm±3
mm.
NOTE

● Do not remove the leveling feet. Otherwise, rework is required if the cabinet height does
not meet requirements.
● Leveling feet adjustment method: Rotate anchor bolts clockwise to raise the cabinet and
rotate them counterclockwise to lower the cabinet. The anchor bolts can be adjusted
within a range of 0–8 mm.
● Put a level at the bottom of the cabinet in width and depth directions and check that
the air bubble is in the middle between the two lines marked on the glass tube.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 80


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 8 Combining Cabinets

Figure 8-3 Leveling a cabinet

(1) Level

Step 3 Combine adjacent cabinets.


1. Remove the M5x10 tapping screws that secure the connecting kits and then
remove the connecting kits.
2. Remove the M4x10 screw assemblies from the position for combining
cabinets.
3. Partially secure the connecting kits using the M4x10 screw assemblies.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 81


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 8 Combining Cabinets

Figure 8-4 Combining cabinets

Step 4 (Optional) Secure cabinets on the bases.


NOTE

Perform this step if bases are required.


● For the PDF/network cabinet/IT cabinet/600 mm wide smart cooling
product/300 mm wide M-shaped smart cooling product:
a. Install the spring washers, flat washers, and insulation coverings on the
bolts.
b. Use an M20 torque wrench to tighten the four bolts in diagonal order.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 82


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 8 Combining Cabinets

Figure 8-5 Securing a cabinet

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 83


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 9 Grounding a Cabinet

9 Grounding a Cabinet

Cabinets are grounded by cables connected from the main ground bar to the
nearby ground grid.

Figure 9-1 M-type grounding (dual-row cabinet scenario)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 84


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.1 Installing Enclosure Plates Around a Column (in


Scenarios with a Column)
Prerequisites
Adjustable skylights and cable trays have been installed in the scenario with a
column.

Context
Because of the column, it is inevitable that certain cabinet places in the smart
module are not suitable for installing cabinets. Therefore, enclosure plates need to
be installed to ensure the sealing performance of the aisle containment.
Secure the enclosure plates at positions away from the aisle and combine them
with cabinets to keep the elegance of the smart module. Stand outside the smart
module during installation.

Table 10-1 Enclosure plate types

Enclosure Plate Name BOM Number

300 mm wide, 2000 mm high 21500707


enclosure plate

600 mm wide, 2000 mm high 21500718


enclosure plate

800 mm wide, 2000 mm high 21500720


enclosure plate

300 mm wide, 2200 mm high 21500939


enclosure plate

600 mm wide, 2200 mm high 21500940


enclosure plate

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 85


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Enclosure Plate Name BOM Number

800 mm wide, 2200 mm high 21500941


enclosure plate

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, hammer drill
Materials: enclosure plates and accessories, plastic expansion bolts, washers

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the positions of enclosure plates, directions of the concave sides of
enclosure plates, and the area covered by the adjustable skylight based on the
actual installation environment.
Step 2 Install enclosure plates near the aisle.
NOTE

Install enclosure plates near the aisle first, and then those near the outside of the smart
module.
1. Connect two enclosure plates using three M6 screws and nuts.
2. Place the connected enclosure plates at the specified installation position,
facing the correct direction.
3. Use a hammer drill with a 15 mm drill bit to drill four 45–50 mm deep holes
at the bottom of the enclosure plates, and secure the enclosure plates to the
floor using four plastic expansion bolts (labeled DKBA44091028) and washers.
NOTE

If drilling holes on the ESD floor is not allowed onsite, use four ST4.8x25 self-drilling
tapping screws and washers.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 86


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-1 Installing enclosure plates near an aisle

(1) Column

Step 3 Connect two enclosure plates using three M6 screws and nuts.
Step 4 Place the connected enclosure plates at the specified installation positions, facing
the correct direction.
Step 5 Find the connecting kits in the fitting bag and secure the connecting kits to the
enclosure plates using M4 screws, and then secure the enclosure plates to the
cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 87


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-2 Installing enclosure plates away from the aisle

(1) Column

----End

10.2 Installing Skylights

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 88


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.2.1 Skylight Layout

Figure 10-3 Aisle skylight layout

(1) Control skylights (2) Rotating skylights or flat skylights

NOTE

If the number of cabinets is greater than 12, the number of control skylights should be 3. Apart
from the end door positions near the two ends, install a control skylight in the middle of the
aisle.

10.2.2 Installing Control, Flat, and Rotating Skylights

Prerequisites
Install skylights one by one from one end of the smart module based on the
onsite engineering layout diagram.

1. Do not squeeze the skylights when installing them. Otherwise, the skylight
connective plates may be deformed.
2. When installing rotating skylights, verify that the rotating skylights can rotate
properly. After installing all skylights, install the end door.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, adjustable wrench, step ladder

Materials: skylight connective plate, skylight plate, cable separation plate, shadow
shield

Procedure
Step 1 Install cable separation plates on a control skylight.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 89


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-4 Installing cable separation plates

Step 2 Install skylight connective plates.


1. (Optional) Install common skylight connective plates.

Figure 10-5 Installing skylight connective plates

2. (Optional) Install a maintenance skylight.


NOTE

In the smart busbar scenario of maintenance inside the aisle, use 82 mm high
maintenance skylight connective plates.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 90


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-6 Installing maintenance skylight connective plates

Step 3 Secure the control skylight to the skylight connective plates.

Figure 10-7 Securing a control skylight

Step 4 (Optional) Install an air baffle between the 2000 mm high end door and the
maintenance skylight.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 91


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-8 Installing an air baffle (without or with a smart screen, 21502418)

Figure 10-9 Installing an air baffle (with a smart screen, 21503054)

Step 5 Install adjacent skylight connective plates.

NOTICE

● Move and secure skylights with care and do not tread on them.
● Place a skylight based on the Keep direction label on the skylight.

Step 6 Secure the rotating skylight to the skylight connective plates.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 92


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-10 Securing a rotating skylight

Step 7 Secure the two adjacent skylight connective plates.

Figure 10-11 Securing adjacent skylight connective plates

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 93


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Step 8 Install a shadow shield between the control skylight and rotating skylight.

Figure 10-12 Installing a shadow shield

(1) Installation position for a (2) Shadow shield (3) Control skylight
skylight magnetic lock

NOTE

Only one shadow shield needs to be installed in one aisle.

Step 9 Install other skylights in sequence by referring to the onsite engineering layout
diagram.

----End

10.2.3 Installing Skylight Magnetic Locks (02070262)

Context
The BOM number of a skylight magnetic lock is 02070262.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 94


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-13 Layout of skylight magnetic locks

(1) Control skylights (2) Rotating skylight (3) Flat skylight

(4) Skylight magnetic lock

NOTE

The skylight magnetic lock layout diagram is for reference only. The actual layout may vary.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Material: magnetic locks

Procedure
Step 1 Remove screws from the skylight.

Figure 10-14 Removing screws from the skylight

Step 2 Install skylight magnetic locks.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 95


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-15 Installing a skylight magnetic lock

Step 3 (Optional) Adjust the positions of the skylight magnetic locks to ensure that the
magnetic locks can be closed.

Figure 10-16 Adjusting a skylight magnetic lock

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 96


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.2.4 Installing Adjustable Skylights (in Scenarios with a


Column)

Prerequisites
Enclosure plates near the aisle have been installed and secured.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, hook knife, marker, hand drill

Materials: skylight connective plate, telescopic side beam, PC panel fastener, PC


panel support, PC panel, L-shaped mounting bracket

Procedure
Step 1 Secure skylight connective plates to enclosure plates or cabinets using eight M8
bolts.

Figure 10-17 Installing skylight connective plates

(1) Column (2) Skylight connective plate

(3) Sealing plate near the aisle (4) Cabinet

Step 2 Extend the two telescopic side beams to an appropriate length and secure them
using two M6 bolts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 97


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-18 Adjusting the length of a telescopic side beam

Step 3 Secure the telescopic side beams to the skylight connective plates using four M6
bolts.

Figure 10-19 Installing telescopic side beams

(1) Column (2) Telescopic side beam (3) Skylight connective plate

Step 4 Select positions for installing PC panel supports. As shown in Figure 10-20, PC
panel support 1 must be installed closely to the column, and PC panel support 2
must be installed in the middle of the remaining area.
NOTE

If the space beside the column is narrower than 600 mm, PC panel support 2 is not
required.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 98


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-20 Top view of the adjustable skylight

(1) Column (2) PC panel support 1 (3) PC panel support 2

Step 5 Secure the two PC panel supports to the telescopic side beams using four M6
screws and nuts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 99


FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-21 Installing PC panel supports

(1) Column

Step 6 Install the L-shaped mounting brackets.


1. Trim the PC panel using a hook knife and place it on the adjustable skylight.
NOTE

To ensure a neat section after trimming, trim the PC panel using the aisle check tool
available in package 0.
2. Use a marker to mark a line on the column where the PC panel closely
attaches to the column.
3. Move away the PC panel, drill holes in the column, and secure the L-shaped
mounting brackets to the column using plastic expansion bolts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 100
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-22 Securing L-shaped mounting brackets

(1) Column

Step 7 Install the PC panel.


1. Pave the PC panel on the adjustable skylight.
2. Secure PC panel fasteners to the PC panel supports.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 101
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-23 Installing a PC panel

(1) PC panel

Step 8 Trim the PC panel to an appropriate size using a hook knife.


NOTE

To ensure a neat section after trimming, trim the PC panel using the aisle check tool
available in package 0.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 102
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-24 Trimming a PC panel

(1) PC panel

Step 9 Attach the PC panel fasteners to the trimmed PC panel.

Figure 10-25 Attaching PC panel fasteners to the trimmed PC panel

Step 10 Secure the PC panel fasteners and the trimmed PC panel to the skylight
connective plate.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 103
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-26 Securing an adjustable skylight side sealing plate

----End

10.2.5 (Optional) Grounding Control Skylights


Figure 10-27 Control skylight ground points

(1) Ground point

Connect one end of the control skylight ground cable to any ground point on the
control skylight, as shown by (1) in Figure 10-27, and secure the other end to the
cabinet top using M5x10 tapping screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 104
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.3 Installing Cabinet Bottom Sealing Kits

10.3.1 Installing Cabinet Bottom Sealing Kits


Preparations
Install cabinet bottom sealing kits under the cabinet beam and seal the cabinet
with castors. After the installation, no air leak is found at the cabinet bottom.

Table 10-2 Specifications of cabinet bottom sealing kits


Installation Installation Type BOM Number
Scenario Position

Cabinet bottom Middle cabinet 600 mm wide 21242005


sealing plate front and rear
sealing plates

800 mm wide 21242301


front and rear
sealing plates

300 mm wide Obtained from the 300


front and rear mm wide smart cooling
sealing plates product materials

End cabinet Front and rear Obtained from the aisle


sealing plates + door packing materials
side sealing
plates
(assembled by
five
components)

Cabinets on Front and rear 21242007


both sides of a sealing plates +
column side sealing
(scenarios with plates
columns) (assembled by
five
components)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 105
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-28 Bottom sealing plate of an end cabinet

(1) Side sealing plate (2) Front or rear sealing plate

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 106
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-29 Installing bottom sealing plates for cabinets on both sides of a
column

(1) Post (2) Cabinet bottom sealing kit

Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver


Material: cabinet bottom sealing kit

Procedure
Step 1 Assemble front and rear sealing plates that are as wide as the cabinet.

NOTICE

● (1) in Figure 10-30 shows the separate front and rear sealing plates.
● (2) in Figure 10-30 shows the assembled front and rear sealing plates for 600
mm wide cabinets.
● (3) in Figure 10-30 shows the assembled front and rear sealing plates for 800
mm wide cabinets.
● The front and rear sealing plates are not required for middle cabinets. Only the
end cabinets and cabinets on both sides of a column (if any) require front and
rear sealing plates.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 107
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-30 Assembling the front and rear sealing plates

Step 2 Secure the front and rear sealing plates to the cabinet using four M5x10 tapping
screws, as shown by (1) in Figure 10-31.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 108
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-31 Securing a sealing plate

Step 3 Place the side sealing plate with dents upward and insert the side sealing plate
into the front and rear sealing plates, as shown by (2) in Figure 10-31.

NOTICE

Side sealing plates are not required for middle cabinets. Only the end cabinets and
cabinets on both sides of a column (if any) require side sealing plates.

----End

10.3.2 Installing Bottom Sealing Kits for Cabinet Door Panels


Preparations
Install cabinet bottom sealing kits under the door panels of the cabinet with round
holes to supplement the door panel height difference. After the installation, the
cabinet door panels are of the same height.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 109
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Table 10-3 Specifications of bottom sealing kits for cabinet door panels
Installat Installati Scenario Type BOM Number
ion on Category
Scenari Position
o

Bottom Cabinet The door 600 mm/300 21242005-003


sealing with panel height mm wide front
plate for round should be and rear
supplem holes and the same as bottom sealing
enting castors the height plates
the door of the
panel hexagonal
height mesh door
differenc panel.
e
The door 600 mm wide 21242005-002
panel height front bottom
should be sealing plate
the same as
the height 300 mm wide 21243006
of the floor- rear bottom
mounted sealing plate
cabinet door 800 mm/400 21242301-002
panel with mm wide front
round holes. and rear
bottom sealing
plates

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 110
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-32 Installing a bottom sealing plate for a cabinet with castors and
round holes

(1) Cabinet with round holes (2) Bottom sealing plate (3) Hexagonal mesh cabinet/
and castors Floor-mounted cabinet with
round holes

Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver


Material: cabinet bottom sealing kit

Procedure
Step 1 Install a bottom sealing plate for a cabinet with castors and round holes.

NOTICE

Bottom sealing plates need to be installed for smart cooling products, PDFs, and
UPS cabinets in the following scenarios:
● Adjust the height of the door panel of the cabinet with castors and round
holes to the same as that of the hexagonal mesh cabinet.
● Adjust the height of the door panel of the cabinet with castors and round
holes to the same as that of the floor-mounted cabinet with round holes.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 111
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

1. Open the cabinet door and align the screw holes in the bottom sealing plate
with the screw holes in the lower part of the cabinet door.
2. Secure the bottom sealing plate using screws.

Figure 10-33 Installing the cabinet front bottom sealing plate

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 112
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-34 Installing the cabinet rear bottom sealing plate

----End

10.4 Layout of Monitoring Devices on an End Door


Table 10-4 Pre-installation checklist
No. Check Item Result

1 The cabinets have been leveled. The height deviation □ Passed □ Failed
does not exceed 3 mm.

2 The distance between cabinet doors inside the dual- □ Passed □ Failed
row aisle containment is 1200 mm (tolerance: ±3
mm).

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 113
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

No. Check Item Result

3 The cabinets in both rows at the ends of the dual- □ Passed □ Failed
row aisle containment are placed with a front-
backward deviation no greater than 1.5 mm.

4 The height deviation between the floor surface and □ Passed □ Failed
base top is within 3 mm, and no deviation is
preferred.

10.4.1 Layout of Monitoring Devices on an End Door


(FusionModule Actuator Scenario)
Figure 10-35 Layout of monitoring devices on an end door

(1) For the exit button (2) For the emergency button (3) Upstream fuse

(4) For the atmosphere light (5) For the automatic door (6) For the FusionModule
power supply status sensor Actuator

(7) For the atmosphere light (8) For the light button (9) For the PAD power
button connector

(10) For the alarm beacon (11) For the PAD (12) For the access control
device

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 114
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

● A revolving door is used as an example to describe the layout of monitoring components on


the end door.
● The access actuator can be installed at the position for the FusionModule Actuator.
● The automatic door status sensor is configured only when the door is an electric sliding door
(BOM number: 21501712-001 or 21501718-001) and there is no smart screen.

10.4.2 Layout of Monitoring Devices on an End Door


(Prefabricated Door Header Scenario)
Figure 10-36 Layout of monitoring devices on an end door

(1) For the emergency button (2) For the exit button (3) Upstream fuse

(4) For the atmosphere light (5) AC/DC power module (6) For the eLight actuator
power supply

(7) For the FusionModule (8) For the PAD power (9) For the alarm beacon
Actuator connector

(10) For the atmosphere light (11) For the light button (12) For the PAD
button

(13) For the access control


device

NOTE

A revolving door is used as an example to describe the layout of monitoring components on the
end door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 115
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.5 Installing Monitoring Devices on the End Door

10.5.1 Installing an Actuator

Context
You can install the monitoring components mentioned in this section in the same
way. The access actuator is used as an example.

Table 10-5 Mapping between the names and BOM numbers of monitoring
actuators

Item BOM Number Description

Access actuator 52271874 Install it at the upper frame mounting


kit for the end door in the smart
module.

eLight actuator 52220928 Install it at the upper frame mounting


kit for the PDF in the smart module.

eLight power 52220928 Install it at the upper frame mounting


supply kit for the PDF in the smart module.

eLight actuator 52221774 Install it at the upper frame mounting


kit for the PDF in the smart module.

Atmosphere light 52221117 Install it at the upper frame mounting


power supply kit for the PDF in the smart module.

FusionModule 52274608 Install it at the upper frame mounting


Actuator kit for the end door in the smart
(FusionModule module.
Actuator scenario)

NOTE

● The eLight BOM number is 52221774 if an end door with a smart screen (21503054) is
installed. The eLight system consists of the eLight actuator, eLight strip light, and cables.
● The eLight BOM number is 52220928 if an end door with a smart screen (21502418) or
an end door without a smart screen is installed. The eLight system consists of the eLight
power system, eLight actuator, eLight strip light, and cables.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Materials: access actuator, positioning kit

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 116
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Procedure
Step 1 Lift the round fastener on the rear plate upward, and take off the rear plate.

Figure 10-37 Removing the rear plate from the upper frame mounting kit

Step 2 Install the access actuator on the guide rail. Determine the installation position for
the access actuator based on the label on the upper frame mounting kit. Align the
upper slot on the rear mounting kit of the access actuator with the upper part of
the guide rail and then press the lower part of the access actuator to clamp the
lower slot of the access actuator to the guide rail. Shake the access actuator in
different directions to check that it is securely installed.

Figure 10-38 Installing the access actuator on the guide rail

(1) Guide rail

Step 3 Install positioning kits. Install two positioning kits on the two sides of the access
actuator to limit the movement of the access actuator.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 117
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-39 Installing positioning kits

Step 4 Install other actuators. Install other actuators in place in a similar way and secure
them using positioning kits.
Step 5 After connecting actuator cables, reinstall the rear plate for the upper frame
mounting kit.

----End

10.5.2 Installing an Alarm Beacon (22010028)


Context
The BOM number of an alarm beacon is 22010028. By default, one smart module
is equipped with one alarm beacon only.

NOTICE

Install the device on a visible end door near the data center door.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Material: alarm beacon

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the buckle from the alarm beacon mounting position.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 118
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-40 Installing an alarm beacon

Figure 10-41 Installing an alarm beacon (in the scenario with a smart screen,
21503054)

Step 2 Route the alarm beacon cable through the door box cable hole.

Step 3 Remove the adhesive paper from the rear of the alarm beacon.

Step 4 Secure the alarm beacon to the door box using one M3 screw.

----End

10.5.3 Installing a Button

Context
● The light button and exit button (green) can reset automatically. Their BOM
numbers are both 16050101.
● You need to manually reset the emergency button (red). Its BOM number is
16050102.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 119
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

● You need to manually reset the atmosphere light button. Its BOM number is
52221117.
The light button, exit button, emergency button, and atmosphere light button are
installed in the same way.

Preparations
Tool: socket wrench
Material: button

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the side panel from the post, as shown by (1) in the figure.

Figure 10-42 Installing a button

Step 2 Remove the buckle from the button mounting position, as shown by (2) in the
figure.
Step 3 Secure the button to the post using the nut delivered with the button, as shown
by (3) in the figure.
Step 4 Route the button cables out of the cable hole in the upper part of the post and
then into the upper frame mounting kit of the end door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 120
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-43 Cable route for the exit button

NOTE

The RJ45 connector of the button cable is reserve under the switch buckle to facilitate
future replacement and maintenance.

Step 5 Reinstall the post side panel, as shown by (4) in Figure 10-42.

----End

10.5.4 Installing an Automatic Door Status Sensor (33010601)


Context
The automatic door status sensor (BOM number: 33010601) is configured only
when the door is an electric sliding door (BOM number: 21501712-001 or
21501718-001) and there is no smart screen.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach the automatic door status sensor to the middle of the top of the external
door header.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 121
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-44 Installing an automatic door status sensor

Step 2 Connect the automatic door status sensor to the AIDI SPARE port on the
FusionModule Actuator.

----End

10.6 (Optional) Installing an End Door (with a Smart


Screen, 21503054, 21503054-001, and 21503054-002)

10.6.1 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door (with a Smart


Screen, 21503055)
Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver, insulated
torque socket wrench, step ladder, level
Materials: sliding door and accessories, cables separately configured for the
internal door header (BOM number: 04095459)

Procedure
Step 1 Install the internal door frame.
1. Put the posts and internal door header horizontally on the floor and assemble
them. After the assembly is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the
door header.
2. Secure the posts to the skylight connective plate.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 122
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-45 Installing the internal door frame

Step 2 Secure the bottom of the posts to the cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 123
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-46 Securing the bottom of the posts

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors (2) Mounting holes for cabinets without
castors

Step 3 Install the guide rail. Tighten the screws in the middle and then the other four
screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 124
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-47 Installing the guide rail

Step 4 Remove the transport protection rubber strips from the glass door and install the
door rubber strips.
NOTE

● Ensure that the door is in close contact with the rubber strips without gaps.
● Ensure that the inner and outer rubber strips are flush with the lower part of the door and
that the rubber strip at the bottom is as wide as the door.
● When installing the rubber strip at the bottom, align it with the glass door handle.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 125
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-48 Installing the rubber strips for the door

Step 5 Install the glass door.


1. Remove the covers from the suspension clamps.
2. Mount the glass door on the holes in the suspension clamp bases.
3. Reinstall the covers of the suspension clamps.
4. Remove the positioning covers from the suspension clamps.
NOTE

– Ensure that there is no gap between the glass doors and they are flush.
– Ensure that there is no friction between the glass doors and posts.
5. Install the front castors for the dampers.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 126
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-49 Installing the glass doors

(1) Suspension clamp cover (2) Suspension clamp base (3) Glass door

NOTE

● Adjust the inner rubber strip to ensure that the gap between the glass door panels is
even and that the door panels are in close contact.
● If the two glass door panels do not align well because the end cabinets are not properly
placed, insert a spacer between the post and fixing position of the backward cabinet.

Figure 10-50 Inserting a spacer

Step 6 Install a magnetic lock.


NOTE

For details about how to install a sliding door magnetic lock, see 10.10.2 (Optional)
Installing a Sliding Door Magnetic Lock (02070215).

Step 7 Install door box hanging kits.


1. Facing the front of the end door, secure the door box hanging kits labeled L
and R to the top of the cabinets.
2. Pull out the cables preinstalled on the posts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 127
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

3. Secure the door box hanging kits to the posts.

Figure 10-51 Installing the door box hanging kits

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 128
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.6.2 (Optional) Installing an Electric Sliding Door (with a


Smart Screen, 21503055-001)

Context

Figure 10-52 Exploded view

(1) Internal door (2) Post (3) Guide rail (4) Glass door
header

(5) Right door box (6) Right door box (7) Smart screen (8) Cabinet sealing
hanging kit plate

(9) Damper (10) eLight (11) Left door box (12) Left door box
maintenance window hanging kit

(13) Logo (14) Door box top (15) Door box hanging
cover kit

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver, insulated
torque socket wrench, step ladder, level

Materials: electric sliding door and accessories, cables separately configured for
the internal door header (BOM number: 04095459)

Procedure
Step 1 Install the internal door frame.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 129
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

1. Put the posts and internal door header horizontally on the floor and assemble
them. After the assembly is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the
door header.
2. Secure the posts to the skylight connective plate.

Figure 10-53 Installing the internal door frame

Step 2 Secure the bottom of the posts to the cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 130
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-54 Securing the bottom of the posts

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors (2) Mounting holes for cabinets without
castors

Step 3 Install the guide rail. Tighten the screws in the middle and then the other four
screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 131
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-55 Installing the guide rail

Step 4 Remove the transport protection rubber strips from the glass door and install the
door rubber strips.
NOTE

● Ensure that the door is in close contact with the rubber strips without gaps.
● Ensure that the inner and outer rubber strips are flush with the lower part of the door and
that the rubber strip at the bottom is as wide as the door.
● When installing the rubber strip at the bottom, align it with the glass door handle.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 132
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-56 Installing the rubber strips for the door

Step 5 Install the glass door.


1. Remove the covers from the suspension clamps.
2. Mount the glass door on the holes in the suspension clamp bases.
3. Reinstall the covers of the suspension clamps.
NOTE

– Ensure that there is no gap between the glass doors and they are flush.
– Ensure that there is no friction between the glass doors and posts.
4. Install the front castors for the dampers.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 133
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-57 Installing the glass doors

(1) Suspension clamp cover (2) Suspension clamp base (3) Glass door

NOTE

● Adjust the inner rubber strip to ensure that the gap between the glass door panels is
even and that the door panels are in close contact.
● If the two glass door panels do not align well because the end cabinets are not properly
placed, insert a spacer between the post and fixing position of the backward cabinet.

Figure 10-58 Inserting a spacer

Step 6 Install door box hanging kits.


1. Facing the front of the end door, secure the door box hanging kits labeled L
and R to the top of the cabinets.
2. Pull out the cables preinstalled on the posts.
3. Secure the door box hanging kits to the posts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 134
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-59 Installing the door box hanging kits

Step 7 Connect the cables.

Figure 10-60 Cable connections for an electric sliding door

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 135
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-61 Connecting cables

(1) Guide rail (2) Access actuator (3) Emergency button

NOTE

After connecting cables to the electric sliding door, perform power-on and commissioning
first. To prevent rework, ensure that the electric sliding door can be opened and closed
properly before installing door box side panels.

Step 8 Perform power-on and commissioning.


1. Power on the rPDU supplying power to the electric sliding door.
2. The electric sliding door starts self-learning and runs. (Do not perform any
operation during the self-learning process. Otherwise, the door running status
will be affected.) After the door is closed, the self-learning is complete.
3. Press the emergency button to manually open and then close the door.
4. Press the exit button to automatically open or close the door.
5. After verifying the preceding operations, power off the rPDU.

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 136
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.6.3 (Optional) Installing Smart Screen Door Boxes


(21503054)
Prerequisites
The sliding door or electric sliding door has been installed.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver, step ladder,
level
Material: smart screen door box (BOM number: 21503054)
This section uses an electric sliding door as an example to describe how to install
smart screen door boxes.

Procedure
Step 1 Install side panels for the door boxes.
1. Secure the door box side panels to the bottom of the cabinets.
2. Secure the door box side panels to the sealing plates on the top of the
cabinets. For details about how to install sealing plates on the top of cabinets,
see 10.13 (Optional) Installing Top Enclosure Plates for the Smart
Module.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 137
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-62 Installing side panels for the door box

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors (2) Mounting holes for cabinets without
castors

Step 2 Install door boxes for the front door.


NOTE

● When unpacking a door box, do not place it directly on the floor. Otherwise, the door
box may be scratched.
● Fingerprints may be left on the surface of the door box. After installation, clean the
door box with water.
● If you need to remove the door box, remove the logo first to prevent it from being
damaged.
● The door box is heavy. It is recommended that three or four persons move the door box.
Do not hold the grille when installing the door box.
1. Route the cables for the logo, eLight, smart screen, and access control device
on the front door, and bind the cables to the beam. Ensure that the cables are
routed neatly.

NOTICE

– If the distance between the door box and the wall is 1200–1400 mm, place
the door box sideways, and then route cables for the logo, eLight, smart
screen, and access control device.
– When routing cables for the access control device, bind the cables to the
binding points shown in Figure 10-63, and pull out the reserved cable
terminals for the access control device.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 138
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-63 Routing the cables for the logo, eLight, smart screen, and access
control device (at the rear of the door box)

(1) Smart screen cable (2) Access control device (3) eLight cable for the right
cable door box

(4) eLight cable for the left (5) Logo cable


door box

2. Lift the right door box by holding the two handles on its sides, align it with
the mounting ears on the side panel of the right door box, clamp the bottom
of the door box into the damper, and mount the right door box. Remove the
two handles and reinstall them on both sides of the left door box.
3. Mount the left door box in the same way.
4. After installing the door boxes, save the handles.
5. Mount the logo on the left door box and connect the logo cable.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 139
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-64 Installing door boxes

(1) Left door box (2) Logo cable (3) Right door box

(4) Handle (5) Mounting ear for the door (6) Door box hook
box hanging kit

Step 3 Install the external door header.


1. Mount the external door header to the top of the internal door header and
secure it.
2. Secure the external door header to the side of the door box.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 140
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-65 Securing the hanging kits for the external door header

3. Install the cover for the external door header.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 141
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-66 Installing the cover for the external door header

Step 4 Install the eLight.


1. Remove the rat guard from the top of the door box and the eLight window
cover at the bottom. Route the eLight from the top of the door box to the
bottom of the door box with the light emitting side facing the aisle door. Bind
the top of the eLight using cable ties and secure the bottom inside the slot.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 142
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-67 Installing the eLight (52221774)

2. Connect the eLight cables.

Figure 10-68 eLight system cables

3. Reinstall the rat guard on the top and the eLight window cover at the bottom.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 143
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

If the eLight is stuck during installation, pull out the eLight with the help of the
traction sling delivered with the eLight.

Step 5 Install the access control device.


1. Remove the original rear panel from the access control device.
2. Take out a new rear panel for the access control device from the fitting bag
and install the panel on the access control device.
3. Pull out the pre-routed cable, connect it to the access control device, and bind
the cable.
4. Push the access control device into the installation position and secure it
using the delivered screws.
5. Take out the rubber plugs from the accessories and reinstall the rubber plugs.

Figure 10-69 Installing the access control device

Step 6 Install the smart screen.


1. Remove the upper and lower hanging kits delivered with the smart screen
and keep the removed eight screws for later use. Take out the two new
hanging kits from the fitting bag and secure them using the eight screws.
2. Take out the gap adjustment spacers from the accessories package and attach
them to both sides of the smart screen.
3. Insert the bottom of the smart screen into the slot and snap the screen into
the slot. Check whether the gaps around the screem are even. If not, adjust
the gaps by adding or removing spacers on both sides of the screen.
4. Partially secure the smart screen using two M4 screw assemblies.
5. (Optional) Check for any protrusion on the top of the smart screen. If a
protrusion exists on the left side, attach a gap adjustment spacer to the right
side of the hanging kit to ensure that the two sides are at the same height.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 144
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

6. Tighten all screw assemblies to secure the smart screen, and then remove the
gap adjustment spacers from the sides of the screen.
7. Remove the maintenance window cover for the smart screen and connect
cables to the smart screen. Reinstall the maintenance window cover for the
smart screen.
8. Install the decorative cover on the top of the smart screen.

Figure 10-70 Installing the smart screen

(1) Gap adjustment spacers for the smart screen

Step 7 Install the top covers on the left and right door boxes of the front door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 145
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-71 Installing top covers

Step 8 Install door boxes for the rear door in the same way as those for the front door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 146
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-72 Installing door boxes for the rear door

(1) Left door box (2) External door header (3) Right door box

----End

10.7 (Optional) Installing an End Door (Without a


Smart Screen)
If no smart screen or PAD is configured, install an end door by following the
instructions in this section.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 147
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.7.1 (Optional) Installing a Revolving Door (Standard


Configuration, 21501043-004 or 21501044-002)
Context

Figure 10-73 Revolving door (21501043-004 or 21501044-002)

(1) Door header rear (2) Door box hanging (3) Door box (4) Post
cover kit

(5) PAD mounting kit (6) Baffle plate (7) Cabinet front and (8) Cabinet side
rear sealing plates sealing plate

(9) Door hinge (10) Glass door (11) Mounting plate of (12) Magnetic lock
the magnetic lock cover
cover

(13) Door header

Prerequisites
1. Before installation, ensure that the glass doors are intact and not deformed.
2. The glass door length and width meet the following requirements:
– 2000 mm high cabinet: length = 2045 mm±2 mm; width = 605.5 mm±2
mm; BOM number: 21501043-004
– 2200 mm high cabinet: length = 2245 mm±2 mm; width = 605.5 mm±2
mm; BOM number: 21501044-002

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 148
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

3. If the requirements are not met, contact technical support.

Preparations
Tools: adjustable wrench, torque wrench, insulated Phillips screwdriver, socket
wrench, hex key, step ladder

Materials: revolving door and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Assemble the door frame.
1. Place the door posts and upper frame mounting kit on the floor, pull the post
side panels from the ends of the door posts, and remove the side panels.
2. Connect the two door posts and the upper frame mounting kit to form a
complete door frame. Ensure that the door posts are aligned with the upper
frame mounting kit.
3. After the assembly is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the upper
frame mounting kit.

Figure 10-74 Assembling a door frame

Step 2 Install the door frame.


1. Secure the door posts to the skylight connective plate (partially tighten the
screws).
2. Secure the bottom of the door posts to the cabinets.
3. Measure the dimensions of positions A and B. The dimensions should be 1250
mm+5 mm. If the dimensions cannot meet the requirements, add spacers
between the posts and the door header.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 149
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

4. Install rubber plugs at the bottom.


NOTE

– The positions of the holes for securing the door posts to the cabinets with castors
are different from those for securing the door posts to the cabinets without
castors.
– Verify that the posts are flush with the cabinet frame.

Figure 10-75 Installing a door frame (for cabinets with castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 150
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-76 Installing a door frame (for cabinets without castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets without castors

Step 3 Secure the door panels.


1. Remove transport protective rubber strips from the upper, middle, and lower
parts of the glass door.
2. Install the rubber strips.
3. Secure the door panels to the door posts using hinges, and install the rubber
covers on the screws.
4. Secure hinges on the side of the door posts using screws.
NOTE

Secure the hinges on the upper part and then those on the lower part. This facilitates
hinge adjustment.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 151
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-77 Installing door panels

Step 4 (Optional) Adjust the gap between door panels.


NOTE

After the door panels are installed and closed, the gap between panels may be uneven or the
door looks ungraceful. If the gap is even and the door looks graceful, skip this step.
● Tilted door panel
a. If the door frame tilts by a large degree, adjust the castors or anchor
bolts of the cabinet. If a post is lifted off the floor due to the adjustment,
add a spacer under the post.
b. If the door frame slightly tilts, add a spacer under the involved post to
correct the tilt.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 152
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-78 Tilted door panel

● Door corner tilt or door mismatch


a. If there is a gap between the door panel and upper frame mounting kit
(a corner tilts downwards), you can push up the lower end of the post. If
a corner of a door panel tilts upwards, pull the lower end of the post.
b. If door panels mismatch, loosen screws between the posts and cabinets
and insert spacers to make the door panels on the same horizontal plane
when they are closed. After adjustment, tighten all screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 153
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-79 Door corner tilt or door mismatch

NOTE

If the door gap is still uneven after the preceding measures are taken, remove, reinstall, and
adjust the rubber strip on one door panel until the door panel edges are in close contact.

Step 5 Install door boxes.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 154
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

● There are two types of door boxes: 1100 mm (door boxes and revolving doors are
packed separately) and 1200 mm (door boxes and revolving doors are packed together).
● When installing the door boxes, pay attention to the left, right, and length labels on the
door boxes.
● For cabinets with different depths, the number of conversion brackets to be installed
may differ, but the installation method is the same. The following uses a 1200 mm deep
cabinet as an example to describe how to install conversion brackets.
● If a hanging kit rubs against the fixing screws in the top panel of the cabinet, remove
the screws in the top panel, and secure the top panel and the hanging kit to the cabinet
using the screws. Ensure that each conversion bracket is secured by at least one screw.
1. Install the door box hanging kit on the cabinet, insert the tongue of the door
box fastener into the gap, and secure the fastener.
2. Mount the door box on the door box hanging kit, push the door box
rightwards until it touches the door post, and insert the two tongues on the
right side into the stop holes on the door post. Secure the door box and its
hanging kit using screws.
3. Rotate the buckle on the door box hanging kit counterclockwise by 90
degrees and clamp it to the door box.

Figure 10-80 Securing door boxes

Step 6 (Optional) Install a magnetic lock.

NOTICE

For details about how to install a revolving door magnetic lock, see 10.10.1
(Optional) Installing a Revolving Door Magnetic Lock (02070261).

Step 7 (Optional) Install the access control device mounting bracket.


1. Remove the baffle plate from the installation position and secure the baffle
plate with the cable hole in the lower part.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 155
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-81 Access control device mounting bracket

Step 8 Install the PAD mounting kit.


1. (Optional) If the feet in the lower part of the PAD mounting support are not
as wide as the PAD, adjust the feet.

Figure 10-82 Adjusting feet

2. Remove the cable hole baffle plate from the PAD mounting kit, remove the
nuts from the PAD mounting support, and secure the PAD mounting support
to the PAD mounting kit using the nuts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 156
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-83 Securing the PAD mounting support

3. Route cables for the PAD, access control device, and alarm beacon, and bind
the cables based on the cable routes.
4. Clamp the PAD mounting kit to the door box and secure it.
5. Tighten the two M5 screws to secure the baffle plate to the hanging kit.

Figure 10-84 Installing the PAD mounting kit

6. Connect the power cable and extension cable delivered with the PAD, route
the power cable through the cable hole in the PAD mounting support,
connect the cable to the PAD, and bind the cable at the connection position
properly.
7. Adjust the feet on the top of the PAD mounting support and clamp the PAD
to the PAD mounting support.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 157
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-85 Installing a PAD

----End

10.7.2 (Optional) Installing a Revolving Door (Advanced


Configuration, 21501713 or 21501714)
Prerequisites
1. Before installation, ensure that the glass doors are intact and not deformed.
2. The glass door length and width meet the following requirements:
– 2000 mm high cabinet: length = 2045 mm±2 mm; width = 605.5 mm±2
mm; BOM number: 21501713
– 2200 mm high cabinet: length = 2245 mm±2 mm; width = 605.5 mm±2
mm; BOM number: 21501714
3. If the requirements are not met, contact technical support.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 158
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Context

Figure 10-86 Revolving door (21501713 or 21501714)

(1) Magnetic lock (2) Door header (3) Door header rear (4) Door box
cover cover

(5) Bottom plate of (6) Baffle plate (7) PAD mounting kit (8) Post side
the PAD mounting kit cover maintenance plate

(9) Post (10) Lower sealing (11) Cabinet side (12) Rubber plug
plates for the cabinet sealing plate
front and rear

(13) Door hinge (14) Rubber strip (15) Glass door (16) Mounting plate of
the magnetic lock
cover

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, hex key, step ladder, level
Materials: revolving door and accessories

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 159
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Procedure
Step 1 Secure the posts to the door header.
NOTE

● Before installation, remove the rear cover from the door header and reinstall it after all
components are installed.
● After removing the maintenance panels from both sides of the posts, put the posts and door
header horizontally on the floor and assemble them. After the assembly is complete, verify
that the posts are flush with the door header.

Figure 10-87 Securing the posts to the door header

Step 2 Install the door frame.


1. Secure the posts to the skylight connective plate (partially tighten the
screws).
2. Secure the bottom of the posts to the cabinets.
3. Measure the dimensions of positions A and B. The dimensions should be
1250+5 mm. If the dimensions cannot meet the requirements, add spacers
between the posts and the door header.
4. Install the rubber plugs.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 160
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-88 Installing a door frame (for cabinets with castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors

Figure 10-89 Installing a door frame (for cabinets without castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets without castors

Step 3 Install door panels.


1. Secure the door panels to the door posts.
2. Open the revolving door and remove the four rubber pads from the top and
bottom of the door panels.
3. Remove the transport protection rubber strips from the middle of the door
panels.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 161
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

4. Install sealing rubber strips at the bottom and top of the outer side of the
glass door panels, and install magnetic rubber strips in the middle of the glass
door panels.

Figure 10-90 Installing door panels

Step 4 (Optional) Adjust the gap between door panels.


NOTE

After the door panels are installed and closed, the gap between panels may be uneven or the
door looks ungraceful. If the gap is even and the door looks graceful, skip this step.
● Tilted door panel
a. If the door frame tilts by a large degree, adjust the castors or anchor
bolts of the cabinet. If a post is lifted off the floor due to the adjustment,
add a spacer under the post.
b. If the door frame slightly tilts, add a spacer under the involved post to
correct the tilt.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 162
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-91 Tilted door panel

● Door corner tilt or door mismatch


a. If there is a gap between the door panel and upper frame mounting kit
(a corner tilts downwards), you can push up the lower end of the post. If
a corner of a door panel tilts upwards, pull the lower end of the post.
b. If door panels mismatch, loosen screws between the posts and cabinets
and insert spacers to make the door panels on the same horizontal plane
when they are closed. After adjustment, tighten all screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 163
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-92 Door corner tilt or door mismatch

NOTE

If the door gap is still uneven after the preceding measures are taken, remove, reinstall, and
adjust the rubber strip on one door panel until the door panel edges are in close contact.

Step 5 (Optional) Install a magnetic lock.

NOTICE

For details about how to install a revolving door magnetic lock, see 10.10.1
(Optional) Installing a Revolving Door Magnetic Lock (02070261).

Step 6 Install door boxes and side covers for the posts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 164
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

● Before installing the door boxes, check whether the eLight needs to be installed. If the eLight
needs to be installed, install it first and then perform the following steps. For details about
how to install the eLight, see 10.12 (Optional) Installing the eLight (52220928).
● In case of 1100 mm cabinet scenario, the 1100 mm door box separately delivered is used,
and the 1200 mm door box packaged together with the door materials is abandoned.
1. Facing the aisle, secure the door boxes labeled L and R to the top of the
cabinet.
2. Pull out the cables pre-installed in the post from the side hole to facilitate
subsequent cable connection.
3. Secure the door box interior to the skylight connective plate.
4. Install the side covers on the top of the posts and install rubber plugs.

Figure 10-93 Installing door boxes and side covers for the posts

Step 7 Install the PAD mounting kit.


1. Install the bottom plate of the PAD mounting kit.
2. Route cables for the PAD and access control device, and bind the cables based
on the cable routes.
3. Remove the baffle plate from the installation position and secure the baffle
plate with the cable hole in the lower part.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 165
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-94 Installing the PAD mounting kit

4. If the feet in the lower part of the PAD mounting support are not as wide as
the PAD, adjust the feet.

Figure 10-95 Adjusting feet

5. Remove the cable hole baffle plate from the PAD mounting kit, remove the
nuts from the PAD mounting support, and secure the PAD mounting support
to the PAD mounting kit using the nuts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 166
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-96 Securing the PAD mounting support

6. Install the PAD cover and pull out the preinstalled cables from the cable hole.

Figure 10-97 Installing the PAD cover

7. Connect the power cable and extension cable delivered with the PAD, route
the power cable through the cable hole in the PAD mounting support,
connect the cable to the PAD, and bind the cable at the connection position
properly.
8. Adjust the feet on the top of the PAD mounting support and clamp the PAD
to the PAD mounting support.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 167
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-98 Installing a PAD

----End

10.7.3 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door (Standard


Configuration, 21501112-003 or 21501113-002)
Prerequisites
1. Before installation, ensure that the glass doors are intact and not deformed.
2. The glass door length and width meet the following requirements:
– 2000 mm high cabinet: length = 2103 mm±2 mm; width = 692 mm±2
mm; BOM number: 21501112-003
– 2200 mm high cabinet: length = 2303 mm±2 mm; width = 692 mm±2
mm; BOM number: 21501113-002
3. If the requirements are not met, contact technical support.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 168
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Context

Figure 10-99 Sliding door (21501112-003 or 21501113-002)

(1) Door header rear (2) Door box hanging (3) Internal door (4) End buffer
cover kit header

(5) PAD mounting kit (6) Baffle plate (7) Door box (8) Post

(9) Post side (10) Lower sealing (11) Lower cabinet (12) Damper
maintenance plate plates for the cabinet side sealing plate
front and rear

(13) Rubber plug (14) Rubber strip (15) Glass door (16) External door
header

(17) Guide rail (18) Fastener (19) Magnetic lock


fastener

Preparations
Tools: adjustable wrench, torque wrench, insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated
flat-head screwdriver, socket wrench, step ladder, level

Materials: sliding door and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Assemble the door frame.
1. Place the door posts and upper frame mounting kit on the floor, pull the post
side panels from the ends of the door posts, and remove the side panels.
2. Connect the two door posts and the upper frame mounting kit to form a
complete door frame.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 169
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

3. After the assembly is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the upper
frame mounting kit.

Figure 10-100 Assembling a door frame

Step 2 Install the door frame.


1. Partially secure the door posts to the skylight connective plate (that is,
partially tighten the screws).
2. Secure the bottom of the door posts to the cabinets or enclosure plates.
3. Measure the dimensions of positions A and B. The dimensions should be 1250
mm+5 mm. If the dimensions cannot meet the requirements, add spacers
between the posts and the door header.
4. Tighten all screws on the door frame.
5. Install the rubber plugs.
6. Reinstall the side panels.
NOTE

– The positions of the holes for securing the door posts to the cabinets with castors
are different from those for securing the door posts to the cabinets without
castors.
– Verify that the posts are flush with the cabinet frame.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 170
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-101 Installing a door frame (for cabinets with castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors

Figure 10-102 Installing a door frame (for cabinets without castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets without castors

Step 3 Install the guide rail. Tighten the screws in the middle and then the other four
screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 171
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-103 Installing the guide rail

Step 4 Install the rubber strips.


1. Remove the transport rubber strips from the glass door.
2. Install the rubber strips for the door.
NOTE

– Ensure that the door is in close contact with the rubber strips without gaps.
– Ensure that the inner and outer rubber strips are flush with the door and the rubber
strip at the bottom is as wide as the door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 172
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-104 Installing the rubber strips for the door

Step 5 Install the glass door.


1. Push a door panel along the guide rail.
2. Set the spring of the middle buffer to the compressed state.
3. Push an end buffer into each end of the guide rail according to the direction
of the arrow on the label.
4. Secure the screws at both ends of the guide rail.
5. Push the buffers to the ends of the guide rail until they are in close contact
with the guide rail screws.
6. Secure the buffers when the springs of the buffers are in the compressed
state.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 173
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-105 Installing the guide rail and glass door

(1) Middle buffer (2) End buffer

Step 6 Install the dampers.


1. Secure the damper and fastener using M4x8 cross recessed countersunk head
screws.
2. Rotate the lower edge of the glass door outwards to allow the glass door
handle to cross the post, insert the damper under the glass door, and adjust
its position to align the holes on the fastener with the holes reserved on the
post.
3. Secure the damper fastener to the aisle door post using M4x8 cross recessed
countersunk head screws.
4. Install the damper for another glass door in the same way.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 174
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-106 Installing a damper

Step 7 Install a magnetic lock.

NOTICE

For details about how to install a sliding door magnetic lock, see 10.10.2
(Optional) Installing a Sliding Door Magnetic Lock (02070215).

Step 8 Install door boxes.


NOTE

● There are two types of door boxes: 1100 mm (door boxes and sliding doors are packed
separately) and 1200 mm (door boxes and sliding doors are packed together).
● When installing the door boxes, pay attention to the left, right, and length labels on the
door boxes.
● For cabinets with different depths, the number of conversion brackets to be installed
may differ, but the installation method is the same. The following uses a 1200 mm deep
cabinet as an example to describe how to install conversion brackets.
● If a hanging kit rubs against the fixing screws in the top panel of the cabinet, remove
the screws in the top panel, and secure the top panel and the hanging kit to the cabinet
using the screws. Ensure that each conversion bracket is secured by at least one screw.
1. Install the door box hanging kit on the cabinet, insert the tongue of the door
box fastener into the gap, and secure the fastener.
2. Mount the door box on the door box hanging kit, push the door box
rightwards until it touches the door post, and insert the two tongues on the
right side into the stop holes on the door post. Secure the door box and its
hanging kit using screws.
3. Rotate the buckle on the door box hanging kit counterclockwise by 90
degrees and clamp it to the door box.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 175
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-107 Installing left and right hanging kits and door boxes

4. Install the door header.

Figure 10-108 Installing the door header

Step 9 (Optional) Install the access control device mounting bracket.


1. Remove the baffle plate from the installation position and secure the baffle
plate with the cable hole in the lower part.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 176
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-109 Access control device mounting bracket

Step 10 Installing the PAD mounting kit


1. (Optional) If the feet in the lower part of the PAD mounting support are not
as wide as the PAD, adjust the feet.

Figure 10-110 Adjusting feet

2. Remove the cable hole baffle plate from the PAD mounting kit, remove the
nuts from the PAD mounting support, and secure the PAD mounting support
to the PAD mounting kit using the nuts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 177
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-111 Securing the PAD mounting support

3. Route cables for the PAD, access control device, and alarm beacon, and bind
the cables based on the cable routes.
4. Install the PAD mounting kit on the door box and secure it.
5. Tighten the two M3 screws to secure the baffle plate to the hanging kit.

Figure 10-112 Installing the PAD mounting kit

6. Connect the power cable and extension cable delivered with the PAD, route
the power cable through the cable hole in the PAD mounting support,
connect the cable to the PAD, and bind the cable at the connection position
properly.
7. Adjust the feet on the top of the PAD mounting support and clamp the PAD
to the PAD mounting support.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 178
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-113 Installing a PAD

----End

Follow-up Procedure
● Adjust the inner rubber strip to ensure that the gap between the glass door
panels is even and that the door panels are in close contact.
● If the two glass door panels do not align well because the end cabinets are
not properly placed, insert a spacer between the post and fixing position of
the backward cabinet.

Figure 10-114 Inserting a spacer

10.7.4 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door (Advanced


Configuration, 21501718 or 21501712)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 179
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Prerequisites
1. Before installation, ensure that the glass doors are intact and not deformed.
2. The glass door length and width meet the following requirements:
– 2000 mm high cabinet: length = 2103 mm±2 mm; width = 692 mm±2
mm; BOM number: 21501718
– 2200 mm high cabinet: length = 2303 mm±2 mm; width = 692 mm±2
mm; BOM number: 21501712
3. If the requirements are not met, contact technical support.

Context
● The original internal door header is delivered with an independent cable
packing case (BOM number: 04095459). The prefabricated internal door
header (BOM number: 21502761) and cables are placed in the same packing
case.
● The FusionModule Actuator and eLight actuator have been preinstalled on
the prefabricated internal door header. The cables preconnected include the
reserved cables for the Access DO/DI and AC IN power input ports on the
FusionModule Actuator, and the cables from the strip light extension cable to
the eLight actuator, eLight power supply, and upstream fuse.

Figure 10-115 Sliding door (21501718 or 21501712)

(1) Electromagnet (2) Door header rear (3) Internal door (4) Guide rail
fastener cover header

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 180
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

(5) Door box hanging (6) Post side cover (7) End buffer (8) Baffle plate
kit

(9) Bottom plate of (10) PAD mounting (11) Internal post (12) Post side
the PAD mounting kit kit cover maintenance plate

(13) External post (14) Rubber plug (15) Lower sealing (16) Cabinet side
plates for the cabinet sealing plate
front and rear

(17) Damper (18) Rubber strip (19) Glass door (20) External door
header

(21) Door box (22) Magnetic lock


fastener

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver, step ladder,
level
Materials: sliding door and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Install the internal door frame.
1. Secure the internal posts to the internal door header or prefabricated internal
door header.
NOTE

– The door header type is subject to the actual delivery.


– Before installing the internal door header, remove the rear cover from the door header
and reinstall it after all components are installed.
– After removing the maintenance panels from both sides of the posts, put the posts and
door header horizontally on the floor and assemble them. After the assembly is
complete, verify that the posts are flush with the door header.
2. Secure the internal posts to the skylight connective plate.
3. Remove the front castors from the dampers.
4. Secure the bottom of the internal posts to the cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 181
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-116 Installing an internal door frame (for cabinets with castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors

Figure 10-117 Installing an internal door frame (for cabinets without castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets without castors

Step 2 Install the guide rail. Tighten the screw in the middle and then the other four
screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 182
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-118 Installing the guide rail

Step 3 Install the rubber strips.


1. Remove the transport rubber strips from the glass door.
2. Install the rubber strips for the door.
NOTE

– Ensure that the door is in close contact with the rubber strips without gaps.
– Ensure that the inner and outer rubber strips are flush with the door and the rubber
strip at the bottom is as wide as the door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 183
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-119 Installing the rubber strips for the door

Step 4 Install the glass door.


1. Push a door panel along the guide rail.
2. Set the spring of the middle buffer to the compressed state.
3. Push an end buffer into each end of the guide rail according to the direction
of the arrow on the label.
4. Secure the screws at both ends of the guide rail.
5. Push the buffers to the ends of the guide rail until they are in close contact
with the guide rail screws.
6. Secure the buffers when the springs of the buffers are in the compressed
state.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 184
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-120 Installing the glass door

(1) Middle buffer (2) End buffer

Step 5 Reinstall the front castors for the dampers.

Figure 10-121 Reinstalling the front castors for the dampers

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 185
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

● Ensure that there is no gap between the glass doors and they are flush.
● Ensure that there is no friction between the glass doors and posts.
● Ensure that the buffers are properly installed.

Step 6 Install a magnetic lock.

NOTICE

For details about how to install a sliding door magnetic lock, see 10.10.2
(Optional) Installing a Sliding Door Magnetic Lock (02070215).

Step 7 Install door box hanging kits.


1. Facing the aisle, secure the door box hanging kits labeled L and R to the top
of the cabinet.
2. Pull out the cables preinstalled on the post.
3. Secure the door box hanging kit to the post.
NOTE

In case of 1100 mm cabinet scenario, the 1100 mm door box separately delivered is used, and
the 1200 mm door box packaged together with the door materials is abandoned.

Figure 10-122 Installing door box hanging kits

(1) Cabinet top (2) Preinstalled cables (3) Skylight connective plate

Step 8 Secure the external posts to the external door header.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 186
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

● Put the posts and door header horizontally on the floor and assemble them.
● After the assembly is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the door header.

Figure 10-123 Securing the external posts and door header

Step 9 Install the external door frame.


1. Stand up the door frame, and secure it to the top of the internal door frame
of the cabinets.
2. Tighten the screws at the bottom of the posts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 187
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-124 Installing the external door frame

Step 10 Install door boxes.


NOTE

● Before installing the door boxes, check whether the eLight needs to be installed.
● If the eLight needs to be installed, install it first and then perform the following steps. For
details about how to install the eLight, see 10.12 (Optional) Installing the eLight
(52220928).

Figure 10-125 Installing door boxes

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 188
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Step 11 Install the post side covers.

Figure 10-126 Installing the post side covers

Step 12 Install the PAD mounting kit.


1. Install the bottom plate of the PAD mounting kit.
2. Route cables for the PAD and access control device, and bind the cables based
on the cable routes.
3. Remove the baffle plate from the installation position and secure the baffle
plate with the cable hole in the lower part.

Figure 10-127 Installing the PAD mounting kit

4. If the feet in the lower part of the PAD mounting support are not as wide as
the PAD, adjust the feet.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 189
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-128 Adjusting feet

5. Remove the cable hole baffle plate from the PAD mounting kit, remove the
nuts from the PAD mounting support, and secure the PAD mounting support
to the PAD mounting kit using the nuts.

Figure 10-129 Securing the PAD mounting support

6. Install the PAD cover and pull out the preinstalled cables from the cable hole.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 190
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-130 Installing the PAD cover

7. Adjust the feet on the top of the PAD mounting support and clamp the PAD
to the PAD mounting support.

Figure 10-131 Installing a PAD

----End

10.7.5 (Optional) Installing an Electric Sliding Door


(21501718-001 or 21501712-001)

Context
● The original internal door header is delivered with an independent cable
packing case (BOM number: 04095459). The prefabricated internal door
header (BOM number: 21502761) and cables are placed in the same packing
case.
● The FusionModule Actuator and eLight actuator have been preinstalled on
the prefabricated internal door header. The cables preconnected include the
reserved cables for the Access DO/DI and AC IN power input ports on the

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 191
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

FusionModule Actuator, and the cables from the strip light extension cable to
the eLight actuator, eLight power supply, and upstream fuse.

Figure 10-132 Electric sliding door (21501718-001 or 21501712-001)

(1) Guide rail (2) Internal door (3) Door header rear (4) Post side cover
header cover

(5) Door box hanging (6) PAD mounting kit (7) Baffle plate (8) Post side
kit maintenance plate

(9) Internal post (10) External post (11) Lower sealing (12) Cabinet side
plates for the cabinet sealing plate
front and rear

(13) Damper (14) Rubber plug (15) Rubber strip (16) Glass door

(17) External door (18) Door box (19) Suspension


header clamp

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver, step ladder,
level
Materials: electric sliding door and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Install the internal door frame.
1. Secure the internal posts to the internal door header or prefabricated internal
door header.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 192
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

– The door header type is subject to the actual delivery.


– After removing the maintenance panels from the sides of the posts, put the posts and
door header horizontally on the floor and assemble them. After the assembly is
complete, verify that the posts are flush with the door header.
2. Secure the posts to the skylight connective plate.

Figure 10-133 Installing the internal door frame

Step 2 Secure the bottom of the posts.


1. Remove the front castors from the dampers.
2. Secure the bottom of the posts to the cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 193
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-134 Securing the bottom of the posts (for cabinets with castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors

Figure 10-135 Securing the bottom of the posts (for cabinets without castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets without castors

Step 3 Install the guide rail. Tighten the screw in the middle and then the other four
screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 194
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-136 Installing the guide rail

Step 4 Remove the transport protection rubber strips from the glass door and install the
door rubber strips.
NOTE

● Ensure that the door is in close contact with the rubber strips without gaps.
● Ensure that the inner and outer rubber strips are flush with the door and the rubber strip at
the bottom is as wide as the door.

Figure 10-137 Installing the rubber strips for the door

Step 5 Install the glass door.


1. Remove the covers from the suspension clamps.
2. Push the glass door into the dampers.
3. Mount the glass door on the holes in the suspension clamp bases.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 195
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

4. Reinstall the covers of the suspension clamps.


NOTE

– Ensure that there is no gap between the glass doors and they are flush.
– Ensure that there is no friction between the glass doors and posts.
5. Reinstall the front castors for the dampers.

Figure 10-138 Installing the glass door

(1) Suspension clamp cover (2) Suspension clamp base (3) Glass door

Step 6 Install door box hanging kits.


NOTE

In case of 1100 mm cabinet scenario, the 1100 mm door box separately delivered is used, and
the 1200 mm door box packaged together with the door materials is abandoned.
1. Facing the aisle, secure the door box hanging kits labeled L and R to the top
of the cabinet.
2. Pull out the cables preinstalled on the posts.
3. Secure the door box hanging kits to the posts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 196
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-139 Installing the door box hanging kits

Step 7 Secure the external posts to the external door header.


NOTE

● Put the posts and door header horizontally on the floor and assemble them.
● After the assembly is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the door header.

Figure 10-140 Securing the external posts and door header

Step 8 Install the external door frame.


1. Stand up the door frame, and secure it to the top of the internal door frame
of the cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 197
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

2. Tighten the screws at the bottom of the posts.

Figure 10-141 Installing the external door frame

Step 9 Connect cables.


NOTE

Cable connection principles of a prefabricated door header: If a manual sliding door is used
onsite, connect the access actuator cable delivered with the prefabricated door header to
the manual sliding door. If an electric sliding door is used onsite, remove the cable between
the prefabricated door header and the access actuator, and connect the cable between the
electric sliding door and the access actuator.

Figure 10-142 Cable connections for an electric sliding door

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 198
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-143 Connecting cables

(1) Guide rail (2) Access actuator (3) Emergency button

Step 10 Perform power-on and commissioning.


1. Power on the rPDU supplying power to the electric sliding door.
2. The electric sliding door starts self-learning and runs. (Do not perform any
operation during the self-learning process. Otherwise, the door running status
will be affected.) After the door is closed, the self-learning is complete.
3. Press the emergency button to manually open and then close the door.
4. Press the exit button to automatically open or close the door.
Step 11 Install door boxes.
NOTE

● Before installing the door boxes, check whether the eLight needs to be installed.
● If the eLight needs to be installed, install it first and then perform the following steps. For
details about how to install the eLight, see 10.12 (Optional) Installing the eLight
(52220928).

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 199
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-144 Installing door boxes

Step 12 Install the post side cover.

Figure 10-145 Installing the post side cover

Step 13 Install the PAD mounting kit.


1. Install the bottom plate of the PAD mounting kit.
2. Route cables for the PAD and access control device, and bind the cables based
on the cable routes.
3. Remove the baffle plate from the installation position and secure the baffle
plate with the cable hole in the lower part.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 200
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-146 Installing the PAD mounting kit

4. If the feet in the lower part of the PAD mounting support are not as wide as
the PAD, adjust the feet.

Figure 10-147 Adjusting feet

5. Remove the cable hole baffle plate from the PAD mounting kit, remove the
nuts from the PAD mounting support, and secure the PAD mounting support
to the PAD mounting kit using the nuts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 201
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-148 Securing the PAD mounting support

6. Install the PAD cover and pull out the preinstalled cables from the cable hole.

Figure 10-149 Installing the PAD cover

7. Adjust the feet on the top of the PAD mounting support and clamp the PAD
to the PAD mounting support.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 202
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-150 Installing a PAD

----End

10.8 (Optional) Installing an End Door (with a Smart


Screen, 21502418)
● If a smart screen is configured, install an end door by following the
instructions in this section.
● The BOM number of the smart screen door box is 21502418.

10.8.1 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door (with a Smart


Screen, 21501718)

Context
● The original internal door header is delivered with an independent cable
packing case (BOM number: 04095459). The prefabricated internal door
header (BOM number: 21502761) and cables are placed in the same packing
case.
● The FusionModule Actuator and eLight actuator have been preinstalled on
the prefabricated internal door header. The cables preconnected include the
reserved cables for the Access DO/DI and AC IN power input ports on the
FusionModule Actuator, and the cables from the strip light extension cable to
the eLight actuator, eLight power supply, and upstream fuse.
● 21501718 is used as an example to describe how to install a sliding door.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver, step ladder,
level

Materials: sliding door and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Install the internal door frame.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 203
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

1. Secure the internal posts to the internal door header or prefabricated internal
door header.
NOTE

– The door header type is subject to the actual delivery.


– Before installing the internal door header, remove the rear cover from the door
header and reinstall it after all components are installed.
– After removing the maintenance panels from both sides of the posts, put the posts
and door header horizontally on the floor and assemble them. After the assembly
is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the door header.
2. Secure the posts to the skylight connective plate.
3. Remove the front castors from the dampers.
4. Insert the bottom sealing kit of the smart screen into the door frame and
secure it to the cabinets.
5. Secure the bottom of the posts to the cabinets.

Figure 10-151 Installing an internal door frame (for cabinets with castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 204
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-152 Installing an internal door frame (for cabinets without castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets without castors

Step 2 Install the guide rail. Tighten the screw in the middle and then the other four
screws.

Figure 10-153 Installing the guide rail

Step 3 Install rubber strips.


1. Remove the transport rubber strips from the glass door.
2. Install the rubber strips for the door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 205
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

– Ensure that the door is in close contact with the rubber strips without gaps.
– Ensure that the inner and outer rubber strips are flush with the door and the
rubber strip at the bottom is as wide as the door.

Figure 10-154 Installing the rubber strips for the door

Step 4 Install the glass door.


1. Push a door panel along the guide rail.
2. Set the spring of the middle buffer to the compressed state.
3. Push an end buffer into each end of the guide rail according to the direction
of the arrow on the label.
4. Secure the screws at both ends of the guide rail.
5. Push the buffers to the ends of the guide rail until they are in close contact
with the guide rail screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 206
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

6. Secure the buffers when the springs of the buffers are in the compressed
state.

Figure 10-155 Installing the glass door

Step 5 Reinstall the front castors for the dampers.

Figure 10-156 Reinstalling the front castors for the dampers

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 207
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

● Ensure that there is no gap between the glass doors and they are flush.
● Ensure that there is no friction between the glass doors and posts.
● Ensure that the buffers are properly installed.

Step 6 Install a magnetic lock.


NOTE

For details about how to install a sliding door magnetic lock, see 10.10.2 (Optional)
Installing a Sliding Door Magnetic Lock (02070215).

Step 7 Install door box hanging kits.


1. Facing the aisle, secure the door box hanging kits labeled L and R to the top
of the cabinet.
2. Pull out the cables preinstalled on the posts.
3. Secure the door box hanging kits to the posts.

NOTE

In case of 1100 mm cabinet scenario, the 1100 mm door box separately delivered is used,
and the 1200 mm door box packaged together with the door materials is abandoned.

Figure 10-157 Installing the door box hanging kits

(1) Cabinet top (2) Preinstalled cables (3) Skylight connective plate

Step 8 Remove the logo from the external door header and install it on the door header
of the smart screen.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 208
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-158 Relocating the logo

Step 9 Secure the external posts to the external door header.


NOTE

● Put the posts and door header horizontally on the floor and assemble them.
● After the assembly is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the door header.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 209
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-159 Securing the external posts and door header

Step 10 Install the external door frame.


1. Stand up the door frame, and secure it to the top of the internal door frame
of the cabinets.
2. Tighten the screws at the bottom of the posts.
Step 11 Install the access control device mounting bracket.
1. Remove the baffle plate from the installation position.
2. Secure the baffle plate with the cable hole in the lower part.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 210
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-160 Access control device mounting bracket

NOTE

The figure uses the door box (PAD) as an example. The method of installing the access
control device baffle plate for the door box (smart screen) is the same.

----End

10.8.2 (Optional) Installing an Electric Sliding Door (with a


Smart Screen, 21501718-001)

Context
● The original internal door header is delivered with an independent cable
packing case (BOM number: 04095459). The prefabricated internal door
header (BOM number: 21502761) and cables are placed in the same packing
case.
● The FusionModule Actuator and eLight actuator have been preinstalled on
the prefabricated internal door header. The cables preconnected include the
reserved cables for the Access DO/DI and AC IN power input ports on the
FusionModule Actuator, and the cables from the strip light extension cable to
the eLight actuator, eLight power supply, and upstream fuse.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver, step ladder,
level

Materials: electric sliding door and accessories

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 211
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Procedure
Step 1 Install the internal door frame.
1. Secure the internal posts to the internal door header or prefabricated internal
door header.
NOTE

– The door header type is subject to the actual delivery.


– After removing the maintenance panels from the sides of the posts, put the posts and
door header horizontally on the floor and assemble them. After the assembly is
complete, verify that the posts are flush with the door header.
2. Secure the posts to the skylight connective plate.

Figure 10-161 Installing the internal door frame

Step 2 Secure the external posts to the external door header.


NOTE

● Put the posts and door header horizontally on the floor and assemble them.
● After the assembly is complete, verify that the posts are flush with the door header.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 212
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-162 Securing the external posts and door header

Step 3 Secure the bottom of the posts.


1. Remove the front castors from the dampers.
2. Secure the bottom of the posts to the cabinets.

Figure 10-163 Securing the bottom of the posts (for cabinets with castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets with castors

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 213
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-164 Securing the bottom of the posts (for cabinets without castors)

(1) Mounting holes for cabinets without castors

Step 4 Install the guide rail. Tighten the screw in the middle and then the other four
screws.

Figure 10-165 Installing the guide rail

Step 5 Remove the transport protection rubber strips from the glass door and install the
door rubber strips.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 214
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

● Ensure that the door is in close contact with the rubber strips without gaps.
● Ensure that the inner and outer rubber strips are flush with the door and the rubber strip at
the bottom is as wide as the door.

Figure 10-166 Installing the rubber strips for the door

Step 6 Install the glass door.


1. Remove the cover from the suspension clamp.
2. Push the glass door into the dampers and mount it on the hole in the
suspension clamp base.
3. Reinstall the cover of the suspension clamp.
NOTE

– Ensure that there is no gap between the glass doors and they are flush.
– Ensure that there is no friction between the glass doors and posts.
4. Reinstall the front castors for the dampers.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 215
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-167 Installing the glass door

(1) Suspension clamp cover (2) Suspension clamp base (3) Glass door

Step 7 Install a magnetic lock.

NOTICE

For details about how to install a sliding door magnetic lock, see 10.10.2
(Optional) Installing a Sliding Door Magnetic Lock (02070215).

Step 8 Install door box hanging kits.


NOTE

In case of 1100 mm cabinet scenario, the 1100 mm door box separately delivered is used, and
the 1200 mm door box packaged together with the door materials is abandoned.
1. Facing the aisle, secure the door box hanging kits labeled L and R to the top
of the cabinets.
2. Pull out the cables preinstalled on the posts.
3. Secure the door box hanging kits to the posts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 216
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-168 Installing the door box hanging kits

Step 9 Remove the logo from the external door header and install it on the door header
of the smart screen.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 217
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-169 Relocating the logo

Step 10 Install the external door frame.


1. Stand up the door frame, and secure it to the top of the internal door frame
of the cabinets.
2. Tighten the screws at the bottom of the posts.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 218
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-170 Installing the external door frame

Step 11 Connect cables.


NOTE

Cable connection principle of a prefabricated door header: If an electric sliding door is used
onsite, remove the cable between the prefabricated door header and the access actuator,
and connect the cable between the electric sliding door and the access actuator.

Figure 10-171 Cable connections for an electric sliding door

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 219
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-172 Connecting cables

(1) Guide rail (2) Access actuator (3) Emergency button

Step 12 Perform power-on and commissioning.


1. Power on the rPDU supplying power to the electric sliding door.
2. The electric sliding door starts self-learning and runs. (Do not perform any
operation during the self-learning process. Otherwise, the door running status
will be affected.) After the door is closed, the self-learning is complete.
3. Press the emergency button to manually open and then close the door.
4. Press the exit button to automatically open or close the door.
Step 13 Install the access control device mounting bracket.
1. Remove the baffle plate from the installation position and secure the baffle
plate with the cable hole in the lower part.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 220
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-173 Access control device mounting bracket

NOTE

The figure uses the door box (PAD) as an example. The method of installing the access
control device baffle plate for the door box (smart screen) is the same.

----End

10.8.3 (Optional) Installing a PAD

Prerequisites
The sliding door or electric sliding door and the access control device mounting
bracket have been installed.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, step ladder

Materials: PAD mounting support, PAD

The BOM number of the PAD is 01091655. The BOM number of the PAD
mounting support is 21203286.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 221
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Install the PAD mounting support.
1. (Optional) If the feet in the lower part of the PAD mounting support are not
as wide as the PAD, adjust the feet.
2. Remove the baffle plate from the installation position and secure the PAD
mounting support.

Figure 10-174 PAD mounting support

Step 2 Install the PAD door boxes.


1. Route cables for the access control device, alarm beacon, and PAD, and bind
the cables based on the cable routes.
2. Install the right door box.
3. Install the left door box.
4. Install the post side covers.
5. Install the door header on the external door frame and install the rubber
plugs in the mounting holes.

NOTE

● Before installing the door boxes, check whether the eLight needs to be installed.
● If the eLight needs to be installed, you are advised to install the eLight first and then
perform this step.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 222
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-175 Installing PAD door boxes

(1) Left door box (2) Cable route (3) Right door box

Step 3 Install the PAD.


1. Connect the power cable and extension cable delivered with the PAD, route
the power cable through the cable hole in the PAD mounting support,
connect the cable to the PAD, and bind the cable at the connection position
properly.
2. Adjust the feet on the top of the PAD mounting support and clamp the PAD
to the PAD mounting support.

Figure 10-176 Installing a PAD

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 223
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.8.4 (Optional) Installing a Smart Screen


Prerequisites
The sliding door or electric sliding door and the access control device mounting
bracket have been installed.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, step ladder
Materials: smart screen and accessories
The BOM number of the smart screen is 06060641.

Procedure
Step 1 Route cables for the access control device, alarm beacon, and smart screen, and
bind the cables based on the cable routes.

Figure 10-177 Routing cables

(1) Cable route for the alarm (2) Cable route for the smart (3) Cable route for the access
beacon screen control device

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 224
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-178 Cable route between the smart screen and smart ETH gateway or
LAN switch

Step 2 Tighten the five M5x10 screws at the top and bottom of the left door box, and
install the right door box in the same way.

Figure 10-179 Installing the left and right door boxes

(1) Left door box (2) Right door box

Step 3 Install the smart screen, smart screen frame, and post side cover.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 225
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-180 Installing a smart screen

----End

10.9 (Optional) Installing an Access Control Device


The access control device applies to an end door with a smart screen (21502418)
and an end door without a smart screen.

10.9.1 Installing a Card Reader with a Keypad (02070172)


Context
The BOM number of a card reader with a keypad is 02070172.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: card reader with a keypad and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the baffle plate from the installation position, as shown by (1) in Figure
10-181.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 226
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-181 Installing a card reader with a keypad

Step 2 Secure the baffle plate with a cable hole on the lower part to the PAD mounting
kit, as shown by (2) in Figure 10-181.
NOTE

Keep the protruding plane of the baffle plate flush with the end plane of the PAD mounting kit.

Step 3 Remove the M2x5 screws (set aside) from the card reader with a keypad and take
off the baseplate, as shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 10-181.
Step 4 Secure the baseplate to the baffle plate using two M3x8 countersunk screws, as
shown by (5) in Figure 10-181.
Step 5 Route the cable of the card reader with a keypad through the cable hole in the
baffle plate, as shown by (6) in Figure 10-181.
Step 6 Secure the card reader with a keypad to the baseplate, as shown by (7) and (8) in
Figure 10-181.

----End

10.9.2 Installing a Fingerprint and Card Reader (02070173)


Context
The BOM number of a fingerprint and card reader is 02070173.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: fingerprint and card reader and accessories

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 227
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the baffle plate from the installation position, as shown by (1) in Figure
10-182.

Figure 10-182 Installing a fingerprint and card reader

Step 2 Secure the baffle plate with a cable hole on the lower part to the PAD mounting
kit, as shown by (2) in Figure 10-182.
NOTE

Keep the protruding plane of the baffle plate flush with the end plane of the PAD mounting kit.

Step 3 Remove the M2.5 screws (set aside) from the fingerprint and card reader and take
off the baseplate, as shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 10-182.
Step 4 Secure the baseplate to the baffle plate using two M3x8 countersunk screws, as
shown by (5) in Figure 10-182.
Step 5 Route the cable of the fingerprint and card reader through the cable hole in the
baffle plate, as shown by (6) in Figure 10-182.
Step 6 Secure the fingerprint and card reader to the baseplate, as shown by (7) and (8)
in Figure 10-182.
----End

10.9.3 Installing a Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad


(02070174)
Context
The BOM number of a fingerprint and card reader with a keypad is 02070174.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 228
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Preparations
Tool: Phillips screwdriver

Materials: fingerprint and card reader with a keypad and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the baffle plate from the installation position, as shown by (1) in Figure
10-183.

Figure 10-183 Installing a fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

Step 2 Secure the baffle plate with a cable hole on the lower part to the PAD mounting
kit, as shown by (2) in Figure 10-183.
NOTE

Keep the protruding plane of the baffle plate flush with the end plane of the PAD mounting kit.

Step 3 Remove the M2.5 screws (set aside) of the fingerprint and card reader with a
keypad and take off the baseplate, as shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 10-183.

Step 4 Secure the baseplate to the baffle plate using two M3x8 countersunk screws, as
shown by (5) in Figure 10-183.

Step 5 Route the cable of the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad through the
cable hole in the baffle plate, as shown by (6) in Figure 10-183.

Step 6 Secure the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad to the baseplate, as shown
by (7) and (8) in Figure 10-183.

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 229
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

10.9.4 Installing an IC Card Reader (06080327)


Context
The BOM number of an IC card reader is 06080327.

Preparations
Tool: Phillips screwdriver
Materials: IC card reader and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the baffle plate from the installation position, as shown by (1) in Figure
10-184.

Figure 10-184 Installing an IC card reader

Step 2 Secure the baffle plate with a cable hole on the lower part to the PAD mounting
kit, as shown by (2) in Figure 10-184.
NOTE

Keep the protruding plane of the baffle plate flush with the end plane of the PAD mounting kit.

Step 3 Remove the screws from the IC card reader cover (set aside) and take off the
cover, as shown by (3) and (4) in Figure 10-184.
Step 4 Route the IC card reader cable through the cable hole in the baffle plate, as
shown by (5) in Figure 10-184.
Step 5 Keep the screw holes of the cover at the bottom and use two M3x8 screws to
secure the IC card reader to the baffle plate, as shown by (6) in Figure 10-184.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 230
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Step 6 Secure the cover to the IC card reader, as shown by (7) and (8) in Figure 10-184.

NOTICE

After the IC card reader has been installed properly, reinstall the cover on the card
reader immediately. Otherwise, the card reader will trigger an alarm after it is
powered on.

----End

10.9.5 (Optional) Installing a Cabinet Fingerprint and Card


Reader Lock (02071312)
Context
● The BOM number of a cabinet fingerprint and card lock is 02071312.
● In the ATO scenario where pre-installation is performed, you do not need to
install the fingerprint and card lock onsite.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, 10 mm hex key (an adjustable wrench can be
used)
Materials: cabinet fingerprint and card lock and accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the three screws from the mechanical lock and remove the lock.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 231
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-185 Removing a mechanical lock

Step 2 Install a cabinet fingerprint and card lock.


1. Unscrew the clamping plate and bolt on the lock, remove the washer and
bolt, and take out the clamping plate.
2. Route the lock cable into the door through the hole and attach the lock
against the door.
3. Secure the clamping plate using screws.
4. Install the positioning kit, washer, and lock bolt and secure them using screws.
You can choose the left or right opening mode.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 232
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-186 Installing a cabinet fingerprint and card lock

Step 3 Connect cables.


1. Route the cables of the cabinet fingerprint and card locks upwards from the
left and secure the cables to prevent them from contacting the door, as
shown in Figure 10-187.
2. (Optional) Connect the cable of the fingerprint and card lock on the front
door of the cabinet to the COM3/AIDI_3 port on the UIM20A expansion
module, and connect the one on the rear door to the COM4/AIDI_4 port.
3. (Optional) Connect the cable of the fingerprint and card lock on the front
door of the cabinet to the COM/DI_1 port on the PDU2000M main control
module, and connect the cable of the fingerprint and card lock on the rear
door to the COM/DI_2 port.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 233
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-187 Installing the cable of the fingerprint and card lock on the front
door of a cabinet (connecting to the UIM20A expansion module)

Figure 10-188 Installing the cable of the fingerprint and card lock on the front
door of a cabinet (connecting to the PDU2000M main control module)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 234
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-189 Installing the cable of the fingerprint and card lock on the rear
door of a cabinet (connecting to the UIM20A expansion module)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 235
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-190 Installing the cable of the fingerprint and card lock on the rear
door of a cabinet (connecting to the PDU2000M main control module)

----End

10.10 (Optional) Installing a Magnetic Lock


The magnetic lock applies to an end door with a smart screen (21502418) and an
end door without a smart screen.

10.10.1 (Optional) Installing a Revolving Door Magnetic Lock


(02070261)
Context
The BOM number of a revolving door magnetic lock is 02070261.

Preparations
Tools: hex key, insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: magnetic lock and accessories, white rubber washer
Document: revolving door monitoring device installation position diagram

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 236
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Procedure
Step 1 Remove the cover of the magnetic lock. The cover of the magnetic lock is located
under the mounting kit on the door. If no magnetic lock is configured, the cover is
used to cover up the magnetic lock installation position. If a magnetic lock is
configured, remove the cover and install the magnetic lock.
NOTE

After a magnetic lock is installed, the cover can be discarded.


1. Remove the cover at the rear of the mounting kit on the door, remove the
four screws at the bottom of the mounting kit, and keep the screws aside.
2. Remove the mounting plate of the magnetic lock cover.
3. Remove the four screws from the mounting plate of the magnetic lock cover
and remove the magnetic lock cover.

Figure 10-191 Removing the magnetic lock cover

Step 2 Remove the fixing plate of the magnetic lock. Remove the fixing plate of the
revolving door magnetic lock using the hex key delivered with the magnetic lock.
NOTE

Four hex socket screws need to be removed in this step.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 237
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-192 Removing the fixing plate of the magnetic lock

Step 3 Install the fixing plate of the magnetic lock. Secure the fixing plate of the
magnetic lock to the upper frame mounting kit using eight M4 countersunk
screws, as shown by (1) in Figure 10-193.

NOTICE

Pay attention to the orientation of the magnetic lock fixing plate, and ensure that
the protruded surface of the magnetic lock faces the electromagnet.

Step 4 Install the magnetic lock. Route cables of the magnetic lock into the upper frame
mounting kit, and secure the magnetic lock to the fixing plate using the hex key
delivered with the magnetic lock, as shown by (2) in Figure 10-193.

Figure 10-193 Installing a magnetic lock

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 238
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Step 5 Install the mounting plate of the magnetic lock cover.

Figure 10-194 Installing the mounting plate of a magnetic lock cover

Step 6 Install the electromagnets.


1. Take the electromagnet out of the magnetic lock fitting bag, and insert the
positioning pins into the electromagnet using a rubber mallet.

Figure 10-195 Installing positioning pins for an electromagnet

2. Insert the assembled electromagnet into the magnetic lock base on the
revolving door, and secure the electromagnet to the door using the screws on
the door and the white rubber washer delivered with the electromagnet.
NOTE

When securing the electromagnet to the door panel, do not over-tighten the screws so that
the white rubber washer is elastic. The washer will adjust the electromagnet to a correct
position because of its elasticity.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 239
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-196 Installing electromagnets

(1) White rubber washer (2) Electromagnet

Step 7 (Optional) Adjust the electromagnets.


1. Adjust the electromagnet until it is completely parallel to the door panel and
in close contact with it, as shown by (5) in the figure.

NOTICE

If the electromagnet does not work properly after power-on, check that:
– The electromagnet provides magnetic force by attaching magnetizable iron
parts to it.
– The revolving door magnetic lock is aligned with the electromagnet face-
to-face.
– No gap exists between the revolving door magnetic lock and the
electromagnet.
If any of the preceding conditions is not met, the revolving door magnetic
lock fails to attract the electromagnet. Troubleshoot the electromagnet as
follows:
– Check the circuit and rectify any circuit fault.
– If a gap exists between the revolving door magnetic lock and the
electromagnet, adjust them as shown by (1) in the figure.
– If the electromagnet is not level, adjust it as shown by (2) in the figure.
– Adjust the electromagnet base and door panel to ensure that the revolving
door magnetic lock is completely attached to the electromagnet and that
the deviation is minimum. Adjust them as shown by (3) and (4) in the
figure.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 240
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-197 Adjusting the gap

----End

10.10.2 (Optional) Installing a Sliding Door Magnetic Lock


(02070215)
Context
A sliding door magnetic lock is optional in dual-row cabinet scenarios.
The BOM number of a sliding door magnetic lock is 02070215. The following
components are required for installing a magnetic lock.

Figure 10-198 Components of a sliding door magnetic lock

(1) Magnetic lock fastener (2) Magnetic lock

(3) Electromagnet (4) Electromagnet fastener

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: magnetic lock and accessories

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 241
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Procedure
Step 1 Secure the electromagnet fasteners and washers to the door panel.
Step 2 Secure the electromagnets on the left and right sides to the fasteners respectively.
Step 3 Remove the magnetic lock accessory and save the two removed screws for later
use. Secure the two parts of the magnetic lock to the magnetic lock fasteners
using screws.
Step 4 Secure the electromagnets to the electromagnet fasteners using the screws and
washers available in the fitting bag of the sliding door magnetic lock.
Step 5 Secure the assembled magnetic lock to the guide rail.

Figure 10-199 Installing the magnetic lock and adjusting the magnetic lock gap

(1) Spacer (2) Electromagnet fastener (3) Electromagnet

(4) Magnetic lock accessory (5) Magnetic lock fastener -

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 242
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-200 Adjusting the magnetic lock gap

(1) Solution 1 (2) Solution 2

(1) Method 1: Loosen the two M6 screws on the magnetic lock fastener, and move the
electromagnet fastener assembly horizontally until the electromagnet closely attaches to the
magnetic lock.

(2) Method 2: Loosen the two screws that secure the magnetic lock. Then insert a spacer
between the magnetic lock and its fastener until the electromagnet closely attaches to the
magnetic lock.

----End

10.11 Installing a PAD Power Connector


Prerequisites
Before installing a PAD power connector, prepare the materials listed in Table
10-6.

Table 10-6 Material list

Item Appearance Description

PAD power connector The BOM number is


14190892.

PAD power connector The BOM number is


14190242.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 243
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Item Appearance Description

PAD power connector Obtain it from the aisle


holder door accessories.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: PAD power connector, PAD power connector holder

Procedure
Step 1 Assemble the PAD power connector holder.
1. Clamp the power connector to the guide rail of the holder.
2. Install the holder cover using two M4x12 screw assemblies.
3. Install the holder baffle plate using one M4x12 screw assembly.

Figure 10-201 Assembling the PAD power connector holder (BOM number:
14190892)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 244
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-202 Assembling the PAD power connector holder (BOM number:
14190242)

Step 2 Connect cables from the power connector to the FusionModule Actuator, and
route the cables.

Figure 10-203 Connecting power connector cables (BOM number: 14190892)

Figure 10-204 Connecting power connector cables (BOM number: 14190242)

Step 3 Secure the PAD power connector holder.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 245
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

1. Remove the baffle plate from the power connector mounting holes in the
door box.
2. Secure the PAD power connector holder to the door box using two M4x12
screw assemblies.

Figure 10-205 Securing the PAD power connector holder

(1) Door box

----End

10.12 (Optional) Installing the eLight (52220928)


Prerequisites
The sliding door, revolving door, or electric sliding door has been installed.

Install an eLight in the door frame of the sliding door, revolving door, or electric
sliding door.

NOTE

The actual door appearance may vary. The figures are for reference only.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, step ladder

Materials: eLight and its accessories

The BOM number of the eLight system is 52220928.

Procedure
Step 1 Place the strip light cable.
1. Remove three white rubber panels from the door frame.
2. Place the strip light extension cable from the top of the post.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 246
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-206 Placing the strip light cable

(1) Strip light extension cable (2) Rubber panel

Step 2 Install the strip light and connect the cable.


1. Route the strip light from the bottom of the right post along the door frame
to the bottom of the left post, and secure it using fasteners.
NOTE

When securing the strip light to the top of the door frame, ensure that the strip light is
smooth and does not protrude.
2. Connect the strip light extension cable from the door post to the strip light
terminal.
3. Route the connected cable and remaining strip light into the post.
4. Pull straight the strip light and its extension cable. Use a cable tie to bind the
extension cable to the cable hole on the top of the post.
5. Secure the side covers for the posts.
6. Reinstall the three white rubber panels on the door frame.
NOTE

Ensure that there is no gap between the joints at both ends of the top rubber panel.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 247
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-207 Installing the strip light and connecting the cable

(1) Strip light terminal (2) Strip light extension cable (3) Right post

Step 3 Connect cables to the eLight.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 248
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-208 Positions of the eLight actuator and power supply (inside the aisle)

(1) eLight power supply (2) eLight actuator (3) Upstream fuse

Figure 10-209 Connecting cables to the eLight

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 249
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

NOTE

● Connect the eLight signal cables of two end doors to COM1 and COM2 on the ECC800-Pro
respectively.
● Whether the PE cable to the power supply needs to be connected depends on the actual
power port.
● After cutting off the strip light, remove the protective cap from the end of the strip light and
install the cap at the cutting point to prevent electric leakage.
● If the internal door header is prefabricated, the cables from the strip light extension cable to
the eLight actuator, eLight power supply, and upstream fuse have been preconnected.

----End

10.13 (Optional) Installing Top Enclosure Plates for the


Smart Module

Context
● Top enclosure plates are installed on the top of cabinets far away from the
contained aisle to decorate the smart module.
● The top enclosure plates can be 300 mm, 600 mm, or 800 mm wide. They
should be installed on the top of cabinets of the respective widths.
● Install appropriate top enclosure plates based on the actual cabinet
dimensions.

Procedure
Step 1 Secure the top enclosure plates to the end door mechanical parts and ensure that
they are flush with each other.
Step 2 Install the top enclosure plates on the cabinets.
Step 3 Rotate the buckles to secure two top enclosure plates together.

Figure 10-210 Installing top enclosure plates

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 250
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Step 4 Install all top enclosure plates on the cabinets in sequence.

----End

10.14 Attaching Cabinet Labels


Prerequisites
Skylights and end doors have been installed.

Context
Labels facilitate subsequent cable connections.

Preparations
Material: label

Procedure
Step 1 Take out cabinet labels from package 0.

Figure 10-211 Cabinet labels

Rule for naming cabinets in the smart module: cabinet type - row in which the
cabinet is located - sequence number

Table 10-7 Label naming rule

Category Letter/Digit Description

Cabinet type IT IT cabinet

NW Network cabinet

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 251
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Category Letter/Digit Description

PDF Power distribution frame

BAT Battery cabinet

A/C Smart cooling product

Row in which the cabinet A Row A


is located
B Row B

Sequence number 01–24 Sequence number of


each type of cabinets

Figure 10-212 Label naming

Step 2 Remove the adhesive backing on the label and attach the label to the imprinted
position on the skylight connective plate.

Figure 10-213 Attaching a cabinet label

(1) Labeling position imprint (2) Skylight connective plate

NOTE

● Ensure that labels are properly aligned.


● If there is no dented imprint on the skylight connective plate, attach a label to the
correct position shown in Figure 10-214.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 252
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 10 Installing the Aisle Containment

Figure 10-214 Positions for attaching labels

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 253
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable


Trough, and Cable Tray

11.1 (Optional) Installing a Smart Busbar


For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, NMW Smart Busbar 2.0 User Manual, or NMW
Smart Busbar 2.1 User Manual based on the equipment model.

11.2 Installing Cable Troughs

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 254
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

11.2.1 (Optional) Installing Mesh Cable Troughs

Prerequisites

Figure 11-1 Mesh cable trough

(1) Mesh cable trough (2) Supports

Context
The length of a mesh cable trough is 2000 mm. If the cabinet length is not an
integer multiple of 2000 mm, cut the mesh cable trough to a proper length.

NOTE

● For example, if the aisle length is 4800 mm, install the mesh cable trough in this way: 2 x
2000 mm + 800 mm.
● The cut mesh cable trough has sharp corners and needs to be polished to avoid injury.

Preparations
Tools: socket wrench, insulated Phillips screwdriver, hex key

Materials: mesh cable trough, support, and cable trough connecting kit

Procedure
Step 1 Secure the supports to the top of the cabinet using four M5x10 screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 255
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

NOTICE

● The angles of the triangular holes on all the supports must face the front door
of the cabinet. If the supports are installed reversely, the mesh cable trough
cannot be installed.
● There are four holes on one side of a support. Use the two holes in the middle
to install the support. Install the supports in the same row in the correct
mounting holes on the cabinets. Do not install the supports in incorrect holes.
● The L-shaped slots should be in the same direction.

Figure 11-2 Installing the supports (cabinet front door view)

Step 2 Insert the mesh cable trough into the L-shaped slot of the support, adjust the
position, and press the fastener to secure the mesh cable trough.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 256
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-3 Installing a cable trough

Step 3 Use connecting kits at the joint between two mesh cable troughs, and secure the
connecting kits using a hex key.

Figure 11-4 Connecting cable trough connecting kits

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 257
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

11.2.2 (Optional) Installing Cable Troughs (600 mm or 800


mm Wide)

Context
● Install 600 mm wide cable troughs on the top of 600 mm wide cabinets.
Install one electric cable trough and one ELV cable trough on the top of each
cabinet.
● Install 800 mm wide cable troughs on the top of 800 mm wide cabinets.
Install one electric cable trough and one ELV cable trough on the top of each
cabinet.
● Install two cable troughs on the top of the cabinet (PDF) at the end of a row
first, and then install cable troughs on the top of other cabinets along the
aisle in sequence.
● Figure 11-5 shows a 600 mm wide cable trough. Its BOM number is
21501142.
● The BOM number of an 800 mm wide cable trough is 21501140.

Figure 11-5 Cable trough components

(1) Partition plate (2) Vertical plate (3) Tray

When installing cable troughs, be aware of rPDU cables and industrial connectors
at the top of the cabinet:

● Cold aisle scenario: Install a cable trough above the front door of a cabinet
first. When installing a cable trough above the rear door, move the cables to
the open area of the cable trough. After installing the cable trough above the
rear door, place the rPDU cables and industrial connectors inside the cable
trough above the front door. For details, see Figure 11-6.
● Hot aisle scenario: After cable troughs above the front and rear doors are
installed, place the rPDU cables and industrial connectors inside the cable
trough above the rear door.
● After rPDU cables and industrial connectors are placed, bind the cables to the
cable trough using cable ties.
● Ensure that the electric cable troughs are located close to the aisle
containment.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 258
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-6 rPDU cable routing on the top of a cabinet

(1) ELV cable trough (2) Electric cable trough

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: cable troughs and accessories
Document: cable trough installation position diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Keep a vertical plate of the cable trough flush with the top surface of the cabinet
and clamp the clasps into the mounting holes in the first row counting from the
front door to the rear door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 259
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-7 Clamping a vertical plate

Step 2 Rotate the vertical plate by 90 degrees to stand it on the top plate of the cabinet.

Figure 11-8 Rotating the vertical plate by 90 degrees

Step 3 Install the other vertical plate into the mounting holes in the second row counting
from the front door to the rear door in the same way. Install one M5x10 tapping
screw inside each of the two vertical plates to ensure equipotential bonding with
the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 260
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-9 Installing the other vertical plate

Step 4 Press a tray along the two vertical plates down to the place between the four
clasps and the cable bridge. Ensure that the tray is fully into the clasps.
NOTE

When installing the tray, do not remove the grommet strip on the U-shaped trough.

Figure 11-10 Installing a tray

Step 5 Install a partition plate. Press both sides of the V-shaped partition plate with both
hands to decrease the angle to a proper degree, and clamp the clasps at the
bottom into the nearby holes.
NOTE

By default, clamp the clasps into the two holes in the middle. In actual conditions, you can
select holes as required.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 261
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-11 Installing a partition plate

Step 6 Install adjacent cable troughs in the same way.

Step 7 Rotate the interconnecting lever and clamp it into the clasps until the lever is
horizontal. This operation interconnects the cable troughs.

Figure 11-12 Installing an interconnecting lever

(1) Interconnecting lever

Step 8 Install the cable trough above the rear door in the same way.

----End

11.2.3 (Optional) Installing Cable Troughs (300 mm Wide)

Prerequisites
The 600 mm wide cable troughs have been installed.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 262
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Context
Install 300 mm wide cable troughs at the top of a 300 mm wide cabinet. The BOM
number of the cable troughs is 21501141.

Figure 11-13 Components of a 300 mm wide cable trough

(1) Partition plate (2) Vertical plate (3) Tray

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: cable troughs and accessories
Document: cable trough installation position diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Place two vertical plates upright on the top of the 300 mm wide cabinet, and
press a tray along the two vertical plates down to the clasps at the bottom.
Step 2 Press both sides of the V-shaped partition plate with both hands to decrease the
angle to a proper degree, and clamp the clasps at the bottom into the square
holes nearby.
Step 3 Align the assembled cable trough with the adjacent 600 mm wide cable troughs,
and rotate the interconnecting lever to interconnect the cable troughs.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 263
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-14 Connecting a 300 mm wide cable trough to a 600 mm wide cable
trough

(1) Interconnecting lever

----End

11.2.4 Installing End Panels for Cable Troughs


Context
● Typically, end panels are installed only on cable troughs of cabinets at the two
ends of an aisle.
● A red end panel indicates that the cable trough is for power cables. A blue
end panel indicates that the cable tough is for signal cables.
● Generally, the power cable trough is located close to the aisle containment,
and the signal cable trough is located far away from the aisle containment.
NOTE

Obtain the cable trough end panels from the end door materials.

Preparations
Material: cable trough end panel

Procedure
Step 1 Hold the top of the end panel with both hands to keep it vertical. Press it from top
to bottom into the hooks at the end of the cable trough until the top of the end
panel aligns with the top of the cable trough.
NOTE

During installation, the interconnecting lever is vertical.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 264
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-15 Pressing an end panel into the hooks

----End

11.3 Installing Cable Trays

11.3.1 (Optional) Installing Cable Trays (Dual-Row Scenario)

Prerequisites
Skylights have been installed.

Context
If cable trays are required, install them on the top of end cabinets.

Figure 11-16 Cable tray components

(1) Cable ladder support (2) Cable ladder

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 265
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Preparations
Tools: socket wrench, insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: cable ladder support, cable ladder, cable ladder ground cable

Procedure
Step 1 Secure the cable ladder supports to the top of cabinets using four M6x16 screws.

NOTICE

Ensure that the side with ground screws faces outwards when securing the cable
ladder supports.

Figure 11-17 Installing cable ladder supports

Step 2 Insert the cable ladder into the cable ladder supports and adjust the position until
the spring holders are snapped into the holes in the T-shaped brackets.

Figure 11-18 Installing a cable ladder

Step 3 Use a ground cable to connect the ground screws on the cable ladder and its
supports.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 266
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-19 Connecting a cable tray ground cable

----End

11.3.2 Installing Cable Trays (in Scenarios with a Column)


Prerequisites
Determine the position and mode (combined or layered) for installing cable trays
based on the actual installation environment.

Context
Cable trays can be installed in two modes:
● Combined installation

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 267
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-20 Combined installation

● Layered installation

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 268
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-21 Layered installation

Layered installation is used as an example to illustrate the installation method.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: cable tray, cable tray supports

Procedure
Step 1 Screw the cable tray supports at the coated positions on the cable trays.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 269
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

Figure 11-22 Assembling a cable tray

Step 2 Secure cable trays to cabinets.

Figure 11-23 Securing cable trays

----End

11.3.3 (Optional) Installing Indoor Cable Trays


For details, see the Indoor Cable Tray Installation Guide.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 270
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center 11 Installing a Smart Busbar, Cable Trough, and
Installation Guide Cable Tray

11.3.4 (Optional) Grounding Cable Trays


Figure 11-24 Cable tray ground point

(1) Ground point

Connect one end of the cable tray ground cable to either of the idle ground points
on the cable tray, and secure the other end to the top of the cabinet using M5x10
tapping screws.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 271
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

12 Installing Aisle Lights or


Atmosphere Lights

12.1 Installing Aisle Lights


Prerequisites
● A light tube is 600 mm long.
● Number N of light tubes (rounded down) = Aisle length L/Light tube length
● If the light tubes cannot cover the entire length of the aisle, reserve the same
installation distance (W) at both ends of the aisle: W = (L – 600 x N)/2
NOTE

For example: If the aisle length is 4800 mm and there are 7 light tubes, the reserved
installation distance at both ends of the aisle should be 300 mm.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 272
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

Figure 12-1 Aisle light layout (dual-row scenario)

(1) Light tube

NOTE

● A maximum of 15 aisle lights can be connected in series. If the number exceeds 15, they
should be installed in different groups.
● Redundant light tubes are delivered.
● Grouping rule: Set an equal number of lights in each group if possible and ensure that
the light cables are routed out of the nearby cable holes in skylight plates.

Context
● Install aisle lights in parallel. Connect the first and last light tubes on aisle
sides in series. Install the light tubes on the skylight plates. The BOM number
of aisle lights is 52220980.
● A light tube has male and female connectors at both ends for interconnection.
When installing lights, ensure that all the male connectors face the same
direction (also the female connectors) for serial connection of light tubes.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, crimping tool, wire stripper, diagonal pliers

Materials: light tube, light holder, multi-cord end terminal

Document: aisle light installation position diagram

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 273
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

Procedure
Step 1 Install lights.
1. Secure light holders to the skylight connective plates using M3 screws.
2. Secure light tubes to the light holders.
NOTE

Ensure that each light tube is secured by two holders.

Figure 12-2 Installing a light tube

Step 2 Install other lights in sequence and connect the lights in series.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 274
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

Figure 12-3 Connecting lights in series

NOTICE

● Interconnect the male and female connectors of lights in the same group.
● For lights in the same group, only the light in either end needs to be connected
to the power supply.

Figure 12-4 Cable connections to lights in the same group

(1) FusionModule Actuator (2) Light

Step 3 Connect one end of the cable delivered with the light tube to the light, and lead
the other end out of the aisle containment nearby.

Step 4 Secure the stripped cable to the cable distributed to the site using a multi-cord
end terminal, and route it to the FusionModule Actuator and PE terminal through
the cable trough.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 275
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

NOTICE

When connecting the cables, mark the L (brown), N (blue), and PE (yellow-and-
green) cables to ensure correct connection.

Figure 12-5 Connecting cables to lights (using one route of light tubes as an
example)

(1) PE terminal (2) FusionModule Actuator

NOTE

● Every route of light tubes should be connected to a PE terminal, which should be nearest to
the corresponding FusionModule Actuator.
● For details about cable connections in different scenarios, see the FusionModule2000 6.0
Smart Modular Data Center Quick Guide.

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 276
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

12.2 (Optional) Installing Atmosphere Lights


(52221117)
Prerequisites
Atmosphere lights are installed at the bottom of cabinets in the aisle.

An atmosphere light is 15,000 mm long.

Context
Install atmosphere lights in parallel. The BOM number of atmosphere lights is
52221117.

NOTE

● If the aisle length ≤ 7,500 mm, only one atmosphere light that is divided into two
segments of the same length and one atmosphere light power supply is required.
● If the aisle length is > 7,500 mm, two atmosphere lights need to be cut to a proper
length and two atmosphere light power supplies are required.
● After cutting off the strip light, remove the protective cap from the end of the strip light
and install the cap at the cutting point to prevent electric leakage.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, step ladder

Materials: atmosphere light and its accessories

Procedure
Step 1 Clamp the strip light into the buckle.

Figure 12-6 Installing a strip light

Step 2 Attach the buckle to the bottom of cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 277
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

Figure 12-7 Installing the atmosphere light

(1) Atmosphere light (2) Strip light terminal

Step 3 Place the strip light cable, install the strip light, and connect the cable.
1. Connect the atmosphere cable from the end door to the bottom of the
internal door frame.
2. Connect the strip light cable to the strip light terminal.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 278
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

Figure 12-8 Connecting the strip light cable

(1) Cable connector (2) Strip light terminal

Step 4 Install the atmosphere light button.


NOTE

For details about how to install the atmosphere light button, see section "Installing a
Button."
The atmosphere light button is installed above the door post on the right side.

Step 5 Connect cables to the atmosphere light system.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 279
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

Figure 12-9 Installation position of the atmosphere light power supply

(1) Upstream fuse (2) Atmosphere light power supply

Figure 12-10 Wiring 1 for the atmosphere light system

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 280
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 12 Installing Aisle Lights or Atmosphere Lights

Figure 12-11 Wiring 2 for the atmosphere light system

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 281
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

13 Installing Power Supply and


Distribution Devices

13.1 Installing an rPDU


Procedure
Step 1 Open the rear door of the cabinet, secure the upper and lower parts of an rPDU to
the mounting plate by installing screws from the first hole near the door frame,
and install the second rPDU at a spacing of one hole.
Step 2 An rPDU is delivered with a ground cable. Connect the ground cable to the nearest
ground point when installing the rPDU.
NOTE

If the 2.2 m high cabinet does not have an rPDU mounting plate, install an rPDU mounting
plate in the corresponding screw holes and then install the rPDU. If the 2.2 m high cabinet
has an rPDU mounting plate, install the rPDU directly.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 282
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Figure 13-1 Installing a full-height rPDU (2 m cabinet)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 283
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Figure 13-2 Installing a full-height rPDU (2.2 m cabinet)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 284
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Figure 13-3 Installing a half-height rPDU (2 m cabinet)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 285
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Figure 13-4 Installing a half-height rPDU (2.2 m cabinet)

----End

13.2 Installing a PDU2000M


Procedure
Step 1 Open the rear door of a cabinet, use a long-handled Phillips insulated screwdriver
to pre-install eight screws from the first hole on the door frame, route the
industrial connector through the top of the cabinet, mount the PDU2000M to the
pre-installed screws, and tighten the screws using a torque wrench. Install the
second PDU2000M with a spacing of one hole.
NOTE

When installing the PDU2000M, install screws at the bottom of the PDU2000M first,
partially tighten the screws to connect the mechanical parts at the bottom of the
PDU2000M to the cabinet, then install and partially tighten the screws at the top of the
PDU2000M, and finally tighten all partially tightened screws.

Step 2 (Optional) When installing a PDU2000M in a 2.2 m cabinet, move the mounting
plate in the lower part of the cabinet downwards by one mounting hole, secure
the mounting plate, and then install the PDU2000.

Step 3 Each PDU2000M is delivered with a ground cable. Connect the ground cable to
the nearest ground point when installing the PDU2000M.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 286
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Step 4 Connect the reserved industrial plug.

----End

Figure 13-5 Installing a full-height PDU2000M (2 m cabinet)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 287
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Figure 13-6 Installing a full-height PDU2000M (2 m cabinet)

NOTE

If the 2.2 m high cabinet does not have a PDU2000M mounting plate, install a PDU2000M
mounting plate in the corresponding screw holes and then install the PDU2000M. If the 2.2
m high cabinet has a PDU2000M mounting plate, install the PDU2000M directly.

Connecting the FE Ports to the ECC800-Pro (Smart Busbar Scenario)


The PDU2000Ms in a single cabinet are cascaded over FE ports and connected to
the POE port on the smart busbar, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 13-7 Smart busbar scenario

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 288
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Connecting the FE Ports to the ECC800-Pro (Smart ETH Gateway Scenario)


The PDU2000Ms in a single cabinet are cascaded over FE ports and connected to
the POE port on the smart ETH gateway, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 13-8 Smart ETH gateway scenario

Connecting the FE Port (SNMP Protocol) to an NMS


PDU2000Ms in a single cabinet are cascaded through FE ports, which are then
directly connected to the NMS, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 13-9 Connecting the FE port to an NMS

Connecting the RS485 Port (Modbus RTU Protocol) to a Third-Party NMS


The PDU2000Ms in a cabinet are cascaded over the COM4 ports, and the RS485
port is connected to a third-party NMS, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 13-10 Connecting the RS485 port to an NMS

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 289
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

NOTE

If the RS485 port is used, set the RS485 and COM4 ports as northbound network ports. The
COM4 port can only be used as a cascading port and cannot be directly connected to a
third-party NMS.

13.3 (Optional) Installing UPSs Outside the Smart


Module
For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or UPS5000-E-(60 kVA-125 kVA) User Manual
(Integrated UPS 3.0), UPS5000-E-(30 kVA-180 kVA) User Manual (Integrated
UPS), and UPS5000-E-180 kVA User Manual (Integrated UPS, 60 kVA Power
Modules).

13.4 (Optional) Installing Battery Cabinets Outside the


Smart Module
Battery cabinets are installed in the same way as other cabinets. The installation
position depends on the design in the bidding phase.

13.5 (Optional) Installing Lead-Acid Batteries


For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning QR code, or Battery Cabinet Battery Cable Connection Quick
Guide.

Precautions for Installing Lead-Acid Batteries


● To ensure personal safety, unpack, move, and install lead-acid batteries by
following the instructions in the manuals delivered with the batteries.
● Wrap the OT terminal of a cable with insulation tape, and remove the tape
when the cable is placed in position and the terminal to be connected is
confirmed.
● Leave one break point disconnected when connecting lead-acid batteries on
each layer, and connect the break point on each layer after other cables are
connected.
● Tighten screws to prevent sparks generated upon power-on.
● Ensure that lead-acid battery cables are connected by qualified technicians.
● Ensure that all the safety measures have been taken before installation.
● Ensure that the circuit breakers in the BCB box are OFF when installing lead-
acid batteries.
● Never short-circuit the two poles of a battery when handling or installing
lead-acid batteries.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 290
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, pallet truck, insulated torque socket wrench,
insulation gloves

Materials: insulation tape, lead-acid battery, copper bar or cable

Documents: lead-acid battery wiring diagram, documents delivered with lead-acid


batteries

Skill requirement: personnel qualified for installing lead-acid batteries

Procedure
Step 1 Use a pallet truck to move lead-acid batteries close to the installation position.

Step 2 Unpack the lead-acid batteries.

Step 3 Install lead-acid batteries on the lead-acid battery rack from the bottom up based
on the lead-acid battery wiring diagram.

NOTICE

Due to space limitation, connect power cables after placing lead-acid batteries on
one layer.

Step 4 Connect power cables to lead-acid batteries based on the lead-acid battery wiring
diagram.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Verify the lead-acid battery cable connections. Ensure that the battery quantity
and cable connections comply with the design and the cables or copper bars are
reliably installed.

13.6 (Optional) Installing the SmartLi Outside the


Smart Module
For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or SmartLi 3.0 User Manual (Long-Term
Backup Power).

13.7 (Optional) Installing a Power Distribution Box for


Smart Cooling Products
For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or PDU8000 Power Distribution BOX-T Quick
Guide (02405344).

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 291
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

NOTE

In the scenario with a smart busbar or precision PDF, a power distribution box (PDB) needs
to be installed to supply power to smart cooling products.

The smart cooling product PDB weighs about 44 kg. It is recommended that the
PDB be installed on a concrete wall with a thickness of at least 70 mm.

Figure 13-11 Dimensions of a smart cooling product PDB

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 292
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

Figure 13-12 Installation layout and space requirements for a smart cooling
product PDB

(1) Smart cooling product PDB (2) Smart module

Figure 13-13 Wall-mounted installation of a smart cooling product PDB

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 293
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 13 Installing Power Supply and Distribution Devices

NOTE

The installation layout and space requirements for the smart cooling product PDB are for
reference only and can be adjusted based on the actual situation of the equipment room.

13.8 Installing a Smart Busbar


For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning QR code, or NMW Smart Busbar 2.0 User Manual and NMW
Smart Busbar 2.1 User Manual.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 294
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

14 Installing Monitoring Devices

14.1 Equipment Layout in the Network Cabinet


Diverse monitoring devices are available. Determine the installation plan based on
the configurations. Figure 14-1 shows the installation positions for certain
monitoring devices for your reference.

Figure 14-1 Equipment layout in the network cabinet

NOTE

● Relocate the cable manager in the rear door position as high as the device to be
installed.
● Use an insulated flat-head screwdriver to insert floating nuts into the device mounting
holes in the rack rails of the network cabinet. Ensure that the floating nuts on both
sides are on the same horizontal line.
● Before connecting power cables for the device, connect the ground cable delivered with
the device from the device ground point to the cabinet ground point close to the device
mounting holes, as shown in Figure 14-2. When there is a special grounding
requirement and a cabinet ground bar can be deployed, connect the ground cable
prepared by the customer from the device ground point to the cabinet ground bar.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 295
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-2 Connecting a device ground cable

14.1.1 (Optional) Installing a TaiShan 200 Server

Context
123 This section uses a TaiShan 200 server as an example. For more information,
see the documents delivered with the server.

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the installation position of the server and check whether floating nuts
are installed. If not, install them first.

Figure 14-3 Installing a floating nut

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 296
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Step 2 Lift the server. This task requires at least two people.
Step 3 Place the server on the guide rails and push it in to the cabinet.
Step 4 When the two mounting ears on the server contact the mounting bars on the
rack, tighten the captive screws on the mounting ears to secure the server.

Figure 14-4 Installing a TaiShan 200 server

Step 5 Connect the power cable to the TaiShan 200 server.


1. Wear an ESD wrist strap or ESD gloves.
2. Connect one end of the power cable to the cable port on the AC power
module of the server.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 297
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-5 Connecting the power cable

3. Use a hook-and-loop fastener to secure the power cable.

Figure 14-6 Securing the power cable

4. Route the power cable along the cable tray neatly, use cable ties to bind the
power cable, and use diagonal pliers to trim off the excess of the cable ties.

----End

14.1.2 (Optional) Installing a 2288X V5 Server

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 298
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Context
Tool: Phillips screwdriver
Materials: 2288X V5 server, guide rail, rubber plug, screw

Procedure
Step 1 Install guide rails.

Figure 14-7 Installing a guide rail

1. Place a guide rail horizontally at the installation position in the cabinet.


2. Fix the guide rail using rubber plugs.
a. In front of the guide rails: If a server is installed using the upper
mounting holes, insert rubber plugs tightly into the holes at the middle. If
a server is installed using mounting holes at the middle, insert rubber
plugs tightly into the upper holes.
b. Behind the guide rails: Insert rubber plugs tightly into the upper
mounting holes.
3. (Optional) To enhance the rigidness and seismic-proof performance of a
server, you can install bolts at the rear of flexible guide rails.
Step 2 Place the server on the guide rails and slide it along the guide rails into the
cabinet.
Step 3 Align the two mounting ears of the server with the mounting bars of the cabinet
and tighten the screws on the mounting ears.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 299
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-8 Installing a server

Step 4 Connect the server power cables to the PDU2000.


NOTE

The server uses dual power supplies. Connect the two power cables to different PDU2000s.

Figure 14-9 Connecting server power cables

----End

14.1.3 Installing an IVS1800

Context
By default, the IVS1800 is delivered without disks. After the IVS1800 is delivered to
the site, install hard disks as required and then install the IVS1800 in the cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Install hard disks.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 300
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

1. Use a PH2 screwdriver to remove the two black screws on the rear of the
chassis cover, and take off the chassis cover.

Figure 14-10 Removing the chassis cover

2. Remove two black screws on each side of the chassis and the silvery white
one on top of the hard disk tray, raise the hard disk tray by 45 degrees, and
take out the upper and then lower layers of hard disk tray.

Figure 14-11 Removing the hard disk tray

3. Place the hard disks with ports facing upwards and align the screw holes on
the hard disk tray with the hard disks and fasten the screws. Before the
installation, ensure that the fastener of the hard disk tray is on a different side
from the hard disk port, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 14-12 Installing hard disks

4. Insert the hard disk tray back at 45 degrees with the opening of its locking
buckle facing downwards, hold the screw in the red-framed part to lower the
hard disk tray until it is level, and fasten the black screws on the left and right
sides and the white screw on the top.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 301
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-13 Fastening the screw on the panel and the screws on the hard
disk tray

5. Connect data and power cables to hard disks. Connect hard disk cable ports
0–3 to hard disks on the lower-layer hard disk tray and ports 4–7 to hard disks
on the upper-layer, as shown in the lower left figure.

Figure 14-14 Connecting data and power cables to hard disks

6. Close the chassis cover, and use a PH2 screwdriver to fasten the rear screws.

Figure 14-15 Closing the chassis cover

Step 2 Install the device.


NOTE

● Before installing the IVS1800 in a cabinet, install guide rails to hold the device. If guide
rails have been installed in the cabinet, check whether they match the device and
whether they block the air intake or exhaust vents of the chassis as the fan is located on
the side. If the vents are blocked, change the guide rails.
● Guide rails that can be adjusted from 500 mm to 800 mm are provided for additional
purchase if required for IVS1800 installation.
● Do not attach rubber feet on the IVS1800 to save space during cabinet installation.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 302
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

1. Install cage nuts (two at the front and three at the back) to fix the guide rail
at the proper position in the cabinet, as shown in the lower left figure. The
lower right figure shows how to install cage nuts. Insert a cage nut into the
square hole from the inside of the cabinet and clamp it to the lower frame of
the square hole. Use a mounting bar to pull the cage nut until it clamps the
upper frame of the square hole.

Figure 14-16 Installing a cage nut

2. Install guide rails. Horizontally place a guide rail to the installation location
through the positioning block at the front of the guide rail and the
positioning hook at the rear of the guide rail. Fasten four M6 screws (two on
each side) to fix the front end and six M6 screws (three on each side) to fix
the rear end, as shown in the lower right figure.

CAUTION

Before installing a guide rail, check the (F/L, F/R) labels on the guide rail to
identify whether it is for the left or right and which part is the front or rear.
F/L indicates the front end of the left guide rail, and F/R indicates the front
end of the right guide rail.

Figure 14-17 Installing a guide rail

3. Install a filler panel for guide rails. Fasten the M6 screws to install the filler
panel for the guide rails.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 303
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-18 Installing a filler panel for guide rails

4. Install the cage nuts that secure the IVS1800. The cage nut installation
locations are the first and sixth holes along the guide rails, as shown in the
following figure.

Figure 14-19 Installing cage nuts

5. Install mounting ears. Use a PH2 screwdriver to secure the mounting ears to
both sides of the front panel of the device with four screws on each side.
When the device is near the front door of the cabinet, fasten screws in hole
groups 1 and 2; when the device is near the rear door, fasten screws in hole
groups 2 and 3.

Figure 14-20 Installing mounting ears

6. Install the IVS1800 in the cabinet. Lift the device from both sides and carefully
position it at the front of the cabinet. Lift the device slightly above the guide
rails, gently place it on the guide rails, and then slide it into the cabinet until
the mounting ears of the subrack contact the mounting bars at the front of
the cabinet.
7. Thread M6 screws (prepared by the customer) through two slotted holes on
each mounting ear. Fasten the M6 screws using a Phillips screwdriver to fix
the mounting ears on the front mounting bars of the cabinet, as shown in the
lower right figure.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 304
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-21 Securing the device

Step 3 Power on the device.


1. Turn on the power switch.
2. Check the indicators on the front panel of the device for its running status.

----End

14.1.4 Installing a LAN Switch

14.1.4.1 Installing a LAN Switch (Smart Module Scenario)

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the mounting holes for the LAN switch based on the network cabinet
device layout, adjust the guide rails or trays, and install floating nuts.
Step 2 Install the mounting ears delivered with the LAN switch and secure the LAN
switch to the mounting bars in the front of the cabinet.
NOTE

This section describes only the installation method. The actual product appearance may
vary.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 305
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-22 Installing a LAN switch

Step 3 Connect the LAN switch power cable to the PDU2000.


NOTE

The positions of power cable ports vary depending on the LAN switch models. Connect the
power cable based on the actual power port of the LAN switch.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
If a 24-port LAN switch is configured, one or two power modules need to be
installed for the LAN switch onsite. Insert the power module into the power slot of
the 24-port LAN switch and tighten the captive screws on the power module
panel.

Figure 14-23 Installing a power module for a 24-port LAN switch

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 306
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

14.1.4.2 (Optional) Installing a LAN Switch (Smart Busbar 2.0 Scenario)

NOTICE

● The LAN switch for the smart busbar scenario is installed in the same way as
that for the smart module scenario. For the installation method, see 14.1.4.1
Installing a LAN Switch (Smart Module Scenario).
● After the installation is complete, attach the label "Smart module LAN switch"
to avoid confusion with the Extranet switch.

14.1.5 (Optional) Installing an ECC800-Pro


Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: ECC800-Pro, SIM card, RF_Z antenna, 4G antenna, WLAN antenna
Document: installation position diagram for monitoring devices in the network
cabinet

Procedure
Step 1 Determine the mounting holes for an ECC800-Pro based on the installation
position diagram for monitoring devices in the network cabinet, adjust the guide
rails, and install floating nuts.

Figure 14-24 Installing a floating nut

Step 2 Place the ECC800-Pro in the network cabinet with caution.


Step 3 Secure the ECC800-Pro in the network cabinet by tightening the M6 screws
clockwise on the mounting ears.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 307
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-25 Installing an ECC800-Pro

Step 4 (Optional) Take out the ECC800-Pro main control module and install the MicroSD
and SIM cards in the correct slots of the main control module as required.
1. Loosen the captive screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control
module, pull the handles on both sides of the main control module, and take
out the module.

Figure 14-26 Removing an ECC800-Pro main control module

2. Insert the MicroSD and SIM cards into the correct slots on the left side of the
ECC800-Pro main control module.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 308
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-27 Installing MicroSD and SIM cards

3. Reinstall the ECC800-Pro main control module in the ECC800-Pro subrack, and
tighten the captive screws on both sides of the module.
Step 5 Install antennas.
1. The antenna can be installed using the magnet on its base. Attach the RF_Z
antenna to the skylight connective plate above the top of the network cabinet
in the aisle containment. Attach the WLAN antenna to the skylight connective
plate outside the aisle containment or the top plate of the network cabinet.
(Optional) Attach the 4G antenna to the skylight connective plate outside the
aisle containment or the top plate of the network cabinet.
2. Route the RF_Z antenna cable through the cable hole in the skylight plate,
through the rodent-proof mesh and sponge strip on the top of the cabinet,
and into the corresponding port on the ECC800-Pro. Route the WLAN antenna
cable through the rodent-proof mesh and sponge strip on the top of the
cabinet and into the corresponding port on the ECC800-Pro. (Optional) Route
the 4G antenna cable through the rodent-proof mesh and sponge strip on the
top of the cabinet and into the corresponding port on the ECC800-Pro.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 309
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-28 Installing antennas

(1) RF_Z antenna (2) WLAN antenna (3) 4G antenna

3. Connect the RF_Z antenna cable to the RF_Z antenna port on the ECC800-Pro,
connect the WLAN antenna cable to the WLAN port on the ECC800-Pro, and
(optional) connect the 4G antenna cable to the 4G antenna port on the
ECC800-Pro.

Figure 14-29 Connecting antenna cables

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 310
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-30 Antenna cable route inside the cabinet

Step 6 Connect the ECC800-Pro power cable to the rPDU.

----End

14.2 UIM20A Expansion Module Configuration


Principles
● Standard scenario (One UIM20A expansion module maps to one IT cabinet.)
Two or more types of intelligent devices are included in each cabinet. The
intelligent devices include the smart U space manager, smart rPDU, cabinet
electronic lock, fingerprint lock, and T/H sensor.

Table 14-1 Cable connection mode in the standard scenario


COM Port COM1 COM3 COM5 COM7

Connected rPDU1 Cabinet front T/H sensor NA


Device door
electronic
lock/
fingerprint
lock

COM Port COM2 COM4 COM6 COM8

Connected rPDU2 Cabinet rear Smart U NA


Device door space
electronic manager
lock/
fingerprint
lock

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 311
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

● Expansion scenario (One UIM20A expansion module maps to four IT


cabinets.)
– Four IT cabinets form a group (skip this part for non-IT cabinets). One
UIM20A expansion module is installed in the first cabinet of each group.
– Only one type of intelligent devices is included in each cabinet. The port
for connecting the intelligent devices to the UIM20A expansion module
must meet the following physical connection rules.
– For example, in the IT cabinet SN IT cabinet 12, 1 indicates that the
intelligent devices connect to UIM20A expansion module 1, and 2
indicates that the intelligent devices are installed in the second cabinet of
the group.

Figure 14-31 Cable connections (using smart rPDUs as an example)

NOTE

● The intelligent devices supported in this scenario include the smart U space
manager, smart rPDU, cabinet electronic lock, fingerprint lock, and T/H sensor.
● One UIM20A expansion module can connect to only one type of intelligent devices.
● In this scenario, devices connected to the UIM20A expansion module cannot be
cascaded.
● If the actual number of IT cabinets is not an integral multiple of 4, connect cables
according to the rules. Idle COM ports on the UIM20A expansion module can be
reserved.

Table 14-2 Cable connection mode 1 in the scenario where one UIM20A
expansion module maps to four cabinets

COM Port COM1 COM3 COM5 COM7

Connected Cabinet 1: Cabinet 2: Cabinet 3: Cabinet 4:


Device rPDU 1 rPDU 1 rPDU 1 rPDU 1

COM Port COM2 COM4 COM6 COM8

Connected Cabinet 1: Cabinet 2: Cabinet 3: Cabinet 4:


Device rPDU 2 rPDU 2 rPDU 2 rPDU 2

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 312
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Table 14-3 Cable connection mode 2 in the scenario where one UIM20A
expansion module maps to four cabinets

COM Port COM1 COM3 COM5 COM7

Connected Cabinet 1: Cabinet 2: Cabinet 3: Cabinet 4:


Device smart U smart U smart U smart U
space space space space
manager manager manager manager

COM Port COM2 COM4 COM6 COM8

Connected NA NA NA NA
Device

Table 14-4 Cable connection mode 3 in the scenario where one UIM20A
expansion module maps to four cabinets

COM Port COM1 COM3 COM5 COM7

Connected Cabinet 1: Cabinet 2: Cabinet 3: Cabinet 4:


Device cabinet front cabinet front cabinet front cabinet front
door door door door
electronic electronic electronic electronic
lock/ lock/ lock/ lock/
fingerprint fingerprint fingerprint fingerprint
lock lock lock lock

COM Port COM2 COM4 COM6 COM8

Connected Cabinet 1: Cabinet 2: Cabinet 3: Cabinet 4:


Device cabinet rear cabinet rear cabinet rear cabinet rear
door door door door
electronic electronic electronic electronic
lock/ lock/ lock/ lock/
fingerprint fingerprint fingerprint fingerprint
lock lock lock lock

Table 14-5 Cable connection mode 4 in the scenario where one UIM20A
expansion module maps to four cabinets

COM Port COM1 COM3 COM5 COM7

Connected Cabinet 1: Cabinet 2: Cabinet 3: Cabinet 4:


Device T/H sensor T/H sensor T/H sensor T/H sensor

COM Port COM2 COM4 COM6 COM8

Connected NA NA NA NA
Device

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 313
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

14.3 Installing a UIM20A Expansion Module

Procedure
Step 1 Secure a mounting ear to each of the two sides of the UIM20A expansion module
using four M4 screws.

Figure 14-32 Installing mounting ears

Step 2 Determine the mounting holes for the UIM20A expansion module in a cabinet
based on the engineering layout diagram, and install floating nuts.
NOTE

Recommended installation position: The third U space from the top to the bottom at the
rear of the cabinet.

Figure 14-33 Installing floating nuts

Step 3 Secure the UIM20A expansion module to the cabinet by tightening the M6 screws
on the left and right mounting ears clockwise.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 314
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-34 Installing a UIM20A expansion module

----End

14.4 Installing a Smart U Space Manager (Connecting


to the UIM20A Expansion Module, 52275819)
Context
The BOM number of the U space e-label for the smart U space manager is
52275817.
The smart U space manager consists of the following components.

Figure 14-35 Smart U space manager appearance

(1) Asset detection strip (2) U space e-label

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 315
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Align the first detection point of the asset detection strip with the cabinet 42 U
position and attach it to the rack.
Step 2 Connect cables between devices and secure the cables using fasteners.
NOTE

● The securing positions of fasteners are for reference only. The actual mounting holes on the
cabinets are used.
● For cables between UIM20A expansion modules, the U space manager is delivered with a 2
m integrated cable and one conversion adapter for extending the network cable (no network
cable is delivered with the U space manager).
● Attach the U space e-label to the detection point on the asset detection strip, facilitating
asset management.
● In a standard scenario of one-to-one connection through a UIM20A expansion module,
connect a smart U space manager to the COM6/AIDI_6 port on the UIM20A expansion
module.
● In a scenario where one UIM20A expansion module maps to four cabinets, connect smart U
space managers to the COM1/AIDI_1, COM3/AIDI_3, COM5/AIDI_5, and COM7/AIDI_7 ports
on the UIM20A expansion module. If the number of IT cabinets is not an integer multiple of
4, according to the cable connection rules, redundant COM ports exist on the UIM20A
expansion module.
● In a scenario where one UIM20A expansion module maps to four cabinets, the smart U
space manager in the cabinet where a UIM20A expansion module is installed should be
connected to the COM1/AIDI_1 port on the UIM20A expansion module. For example, if the
UIM20A expansion module is installed in cabinet A03, the smart U space manager in cabinet
A03 should be connected to the COM1/AIDI_1 port on the UIM20A expansion module.

Figure 14-36 Installing a smart U space manager

(1) Fastener (2) UIM20A expansion module (3) Asset detection strip (42 U
detection point)

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 316
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

14.5 Installing a Smart U Space Manager (Connecting


to the PDU2000M Main Control Module, 52275819)
Context
The BOM number of the U space e-label for the smart U space manager is
52275817.
The smart U space manager consists of the following components.

Figure 14-37 Smart U space manager

(1) Asset detection strip (2) U space e-label

Procedure
Step 1 Align the first detection point of the asset detection strip with the cabinet 42 U
position and attach it to the rack.
Step 2 Connect cables between devices and secure the cables using fasteners.
NOTE

● The securing positions of fasteners are for reference only. The actual mounting holes on the
cabinets are used.
● For cables between PDU2000Ms, the U space manager is delivered with a 2 m integrated
cable and one conversion adapter for extending the network cable (no network cable is
delivered with the U space manager).
● Attach the U space e-label to the detection point on the asset detection strip, facilitating
asset management.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 317
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-38 Installing a smart U space manager

(1) Fastener (2) Asset detection strip (42 U (3) PDU2000M main control
detection point) module

----End

14.6 (Optional) Installing a Cabinet Temperature


Sensor (Connecting to the UIM20A Expansion Module,
33010557)
Context
The BOM number of temperature sensors is 33010557. (Two temperature sensor
cables and one extension cable are included. Each temperature sensor cable
involves three NTC sensors.)
The BOM number of T/H sensors is 02312PBL.
Install temperature sensors in the IT cabinet and network cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach a T/H sensor to the top of the cabinet front door.
Step 2 Install one temperature sensor on the front door and the other on the rear door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 318
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Step 3 Route the extension cable through the sponge strips between the rack rail and
side panel, and secure the cable.
Step 4 Connect the cables of the temperature sensor on the front door to NTC1–3 of the
T/H sensor, connect one end of the extension cable to NTC4–6 of the T/H sensor
on the rear door, and connect the other end to the temperature sensor.
Step 5 Bind the cables with fasteners.
NOTE

● The securing positions of fasteners are for reference only. The actual mounting holes on the
cabinets are used.
● The temperature sensor cables are installed in the middle of the cabinet door and are
vertical from top to bottom after installation.
● If a T/H sensor needs to be connected in a standard scenario, connect it to the COM5/AIDI_5
port on the UIM20A expansion module.
● In a scenario where one UIM20A expansion module maps to four cabinets, connect T/H
sensors to the COM1/AIDI_1, COM3/AIDI_3, COM5/AIDI_5, and COM7/AIDI_7 ports on the
UIM20A expansion module. If the number of IT cabinets is not an integer multiple of 4,
according to the cable connection rules, leave the unconnected COM ports on the UIM20A
expansion module idle.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 319
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-39 Installing temperature sensors

(1) Fastener

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 320
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-40 Connecting temperature sensor cables

(1) UIM20A expansion module (2) T/H sensor (3) Temperature sensor

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 321
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

14.7 (Optional) Installing a Cabinet Temperature


Sensor (Connecting to the PDU2000M Main Control
Module, 33010557)
Context
The BOM number of temperature sensors is 33010557. (Two temperature sensor
cables and one extension cable are included. Each temperature sensor cable
involves three NTC sensors.)
The BOM number of T/H sensors is 02312PBL.
Install temperature sensors in the IT cabinet and network cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach a T/H sensor to the top of the cabinet front door.
Step 2 Install one temperature sensor on the front door and the other on the rear door.
Step 3 Route the extension cable through the sponge strips between the rack rail and
side panel, and secure the cable.
Step 4 Connect the cables of the temperature sensor on the front door to NTC1–3 of the
T/H sensor, connect one end of the extension cable to NTC4–6 of the T/H sensor
on the rear door, and connect the other end to the temperature sensor.
Step 5 Bind the cables with fasteners.
NOTE

● The securing positions of fasteners are for reference only. The actual mounting holes on the
cabinets are used.
● The temperature sensor cables are installed in the middle of the cabinet door and are
vertical from top to bottom after installation.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 322
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-41 Installing temperature sensors

(1) Fastener

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 323
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-42 Connecting temperature sensor cables

(1) PDU2000M main control (2) T/H sensor (3) Temperature sensor
module

----End

14.8 Installing Monitoring Devices on a Control


Skylight
Monitoring devices are installed in appropriate holes on the control skylight.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 324
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-43 Control skylight

(1) Camera mounting hole (2) Mounting hole for the multi-functional
sensor or smoke detector

NOTE

● After monitoring devices are installed on the control skylight and cables are routed, attach
sponge to the two monitoring device mounting holes outside the top of the control skylight
to block the holes.
● If no monitoring device is installed on the control skylight, attach sponge to the mounting
holes outside the top of the control skylight to block the holes.
● Obtain black sponge from the fitting bag for the control skylight.

14.8.1 Installing a Camera (02233JGP)

Prerequisites
Control skylights have been installed.

Context
The camera needs to be installed on a control skylight.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Materials: SD card, camera

Procedure
Step 1 Install an SD card.
1. Remove the transparent cover using an insulated Phillips screwdriver.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 325
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-44 Removing the transparent cover

2. Gently insert the SD card into the SD card slot.

Figure 14-45 Installing an SD card

Step 2 Route the camera cable through the control skylight.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 326
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Step 3 Align the holes in the camera base with the holes on the control skylight, and
secure the camera to the control skylight.

Figure 14-46 Installing a camera base

(1) Cable outlet

Step 4 Use an insulated Phillips screwdriver to loosen the screws on both sides of the
lens, adjust the surveillance angle, and tighten the screws to 0.6 N·m.

Figure 14-47 Adjusting the camera

NOTICE

● By default, the camera is horizontally installed, and the surveillance video is


displayed horizontally. During the installation, adjust the surveillance angle to
avoid video image rotation after the installation.
● When adjusting the surveillance angle, pay attention to the position of the
illuminator to prevent the illuminator from being blocked.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 327
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

NOTE

The camera features a three-axis design. The camera can be adjusted by –175° to +180°
horizontally, and the lens can rotate –175° to +180° and be adjusted by 0° to 65° vertically.

Step 5 Align the transparent cover with the screw holes on the base, close the
transparent cover, and use an insulated Phillips screwdriver to tighten the screws
to 0.8 N·m.

Figure 14-48 Installing the transparent cover

----End

14.8.2 (Optional) Installing a Smoke Detector (33010311)

Context
The screws for installing a smoke detector are in the fitting bag of the supporting
object.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 328
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Material: smoke detector

Procedure
Step 1 Rotate the smoke detector body counterclockwise to separate the body from the
base.

Step 2 Secure the smoke detector base to the correct holes on the control skylight using
M3x10 screws.

Figure 14-49 Installing a smoke detector

Step 3 Route the smoke detector cable through the reserved cable hole.

Step 4 Align the mounting hole on the smoke detector body with the mounting hole on
the base, and rotate the body clockwise until it locks in.

Step 5 Connect the cable.


1. (Optional) If one smoke detector is installed onsite, connect the smoke
detector cable to the AI/DI Smoke port on the FusionModule Actuator.
2. (Optional) If multiple smoke detectors are installed onsite, connect the smoke
detector cables to the AI/DI ports on the ECC800 or UIM20A expansion
module.

----End

14.8.3 (Optional) Installing Multi-Functional Sensors

Context
The BOM numbers of multi-functional sensors are 33010477 and 33010680.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver

Material: multi-functional sensor

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 329
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Align the holes in the multi-functional sensor base with those in the control
skylight, and secure the base to the control skylight using two M3x10 screw
assemblies.

Figure 14-50 Installing a multi-functional sensor (33010477)

Figure 14-51 Installing a multi-functional sensor (33010680)

Step 2 Route the cable of the multi-functional sensor through the cable hole in the
control skylight.

Step 3 Secure the multi-functional sensor body to the base.

----End

14.9 Installing Monitoring Devices on Cable Troughs

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 330
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

14.9.1 Layout of Smart ETH Gateways (FusionModule


Actuator Dual-Row Scenario)
NOTE

Components marked in the same background color should be connected to the same smart
ETH gateway.

Table 14-6 Scenario 1


Scenario Rules for Deploying Smart ETH
Gateways

● UIM20A expansion module not Deploy 1 PCS for each end cabinet in
deployed the smart module, not for other
● Module length ≤ 7 m and the cabinets. A total of 4 PCS should be
number of smart cooling products ≤ deployed.
4

Figure 14-52 Layout of smart ETH gateways in scenario 1

Table 14-7 Scenario 2


Scenario Rules for Deploying Smart ETH
Gateways

● UIM20A expansion module not Deploy 1 PCS for each end cabinet and
deployed IT cabinet in the middle in the smart
● Module length > 7 m or the module, not for other cabinets. A total
number of smart cooling products > of 6 PCS should be deployed.
4

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 331
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-53 Layout of smart ETH gateways in scenario 2

Table 14-8 Scenario 3


Scenario Rules for Deploying Smart ETH
Gateways

UIM20A expansion module deployed Deploy 1 PCS for each end cabinet and
1 PCS for every three cabinets among
other cabinets in the smart module.

Figure 14-54 Layout of smart ETH gateways in scenario 3

NOTE

● When the smart module is 4 m long or less, no multi-functional sensor is deployed in the
network cabinet.
● When the smart module is longer than 7 m, deploy one multi-functional sensor in the
middle of the smart module aisle (one more control skylight is deployed). The multi-
functional sensor can be connected to any smart ETH gateway in the middle.

14.9.2 Installing a Smart ETH Gateway (Cable Trough


Scenario)
Preparations
Tool: Phillips screwdriver
Materials: smart ETH gateway and accessories

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 332
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Use two M4x10 screw assemblies to secure the guide rail for the smart ETH
gateway to the cable trough, as shown in Figure 14-55.

Figure 14-55 Installing a smart ETH gateway

Step 2 Connect one end of the ground cable available in the smart ETH gateway package
to the ground point at the lower part of the cable trough using one M4 screw, and
connect the other end to the ground point on the side of the smart ETH gateway,
as shown in Figure 14-55.
NOTE

The M4 screw used for connecting the ground cable to the cable trough is available in the
cable trough package.

Step 3 Install the smart ETH gateway to the guide rail, as shown in Figure 14-55.
1. Align the upper slot of the guide rail for the smart ETH gateway with the
upper part of the guide rail, and pre-mount it onto the guide rail.
2. Press the lower part of the smart ETH gateway to clamp the smart ETH
gateway onto the guide rail.
3. Shake the smart ETH gateway in different directions to ensure that it is
reliably installed.

----End

14.9.3 Installing a Smart ETH Gateway (Mesh Cable Trough


Scenario)
Preparations
Tools: Phillips screwdriver
Materials: smart ETH gateway, accessories

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 333
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the smart ETH gateway accessory to the mesh cable trough.

Step 2 Use two M4x10 screw assemblies to secure the guide rail for the smart ETH
gateway to the accessory, as shown in Figure 14-56.

Figure 14-56 Installing the smart ETH gateway

Step 3 Install the smart ETH gateway to the guide rail, as shown in Figure 14-56.
1. Align the upper slot of the guide rail for the smart ETH gateway with the
upper part of the guide rail, and mount it onto the guide rail.
2. Press the lower part of the smart ETH gateway to clamp the smart ETH
gateway onto the guide rail.
3. Shake the smart ETH gateway in different directions to ensure that it is
reliably installed.

----End

14.10 Rules for Deploying T/H Sensors


Context
● Determine the number of T/H sensors to be deployed based on the number of
smart cooling products.
● Each smart cooling product can be configured additionally with three external
T/H sensors.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 334
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Mark management areas based on the smart cooling product layout.
● Scenario 1: If there is an odd number of IT cabinets between smart cooling
products, the middle cabinet should be categorized to the smart cooling
product area on the front left, as shown in Figure 14-57.
NOTE

Components shown in the same shade belong to the same area.

Figure 14-57 Zoning an odd number of cabinets

● Scenario 2: If there is an even number of IT cabinets between smart cooling


products, the smart cooling product areas should be evenly zoned, as shown
in Figure 14-58.
NOTE

Components shown in the same shade belong to the same area.

Figure 14-58 Zoning an even number of cabinets

Step 2 Assign T/H sensors by area.

Assign three T/H sensors for each area as follows:


1. Assign the first T/H sensor to the cabinet furthest from the smart cooling
product, as shown by (1) in Figure 14-59 and Figure 14-60.
NOTE

If there is the same number of cabinets on the two sides of a smart cooling product
(as shown by smart cooling product 3 in Figure 14-59 and Figure 14-60),
preferentially deploy a T/H sensor to the cabinet on the left side of the smart cooling
product.
2. Assign the second T/H sensor to the cabinet furthest from the other side of
the smart cooling product, as shown by (2) in Figure 14-59 and Figure
14-60.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 335
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

3. Assign the third T/H sensor to the cabinet that is between the first T/H sensor
and the smart cooling product and near the smart cooling product, as shown
by (3) in Figure 14-59 and Figure 14-60.

Figure 14-59 Assigning T/H sensors for an odd number of cabinets between smart
cooling products

Figure 14-60 Assigning T/H sensors for an even number of cabinets between
smart cooling products

----End

14.11 Installing a T/H Sensor (33010516)


NOTE

If the NetCol5000-A025 or NetCol5000-A050 smart cooling product is selected, use the T/H
sensor with the BOM number 33010516.

14.11.1 Installing a T/H Sensor


T/H sensors collect the temperature and humidity data of the front and rear doors
of IT cabinets. Smart cooling products control the temperature and humidity in the
aisle containment based on the data collected by the sensors.

Prerequisites
NOTE

In the smart module scenario, supply and return air control by smart cooling products is not
recommended. If cold aisle containment is deployed, cold aisle control is recommended. If
hot aisle containment is deployed, hot aisle control is recommended.

Terms

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 336
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

● Supply air control by a smart cooling product: The smart cooling product
controls the temperature at its front door so that the temperature is close to
the temperature set on the smart cooling product.
● Return air control by a smart cooling product: The smart cooling product
controls the temperature at its rear door so that the temperature is close to
the temperature set on the smart cooling product.
● Cold aisle control by a smart cooling product: The smart cooling product
controls the temperature at front doors of IT cabinets so that the temperature
is close to the temperature set on the smart cooling product.
● Hot aisle control by a smart cooling product: The smart cooling product
controls the temperature at rear doors of IT cabinets so that the temperature
is close to the temperature set on the smart cooling product.

Context
If the smart cooling product implements cold aisle control, install the T/H sensor
on the front door frame of the IT cabinet. If the smart cooling product implements
hot aisle control, install the T/H sensor on the rear door frame of the IT cabinet.

Preparations
Tool: insulated Phillips screwdriver
Materials: T/H sensor, T/H sensor base
Document: T/H sensor installation position diagram

Procedure
Step 1 Secure the T/H sensor base to the 33 U position on the IT cabinet door frame
using M5x10 tapping screws.
NOTE

The T/H sensor can be installed between the 33 U and 40 U positions based on site
requirements.

Step 2 Mount the T/H sensor onto the secured base.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 337
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-61 Installing a T/H sensor

NOTE

Secure the T/H sensors inside the cabinet at the return air side of the smart cooling product
and connect their IN ports to the main control board. When connecting the T/H sensors
outside the cabinet, connect the OUT port of one T/H sensor inside the cabinet to the IN
port of the next T/H sensor outside the cabinet. Connect all T/H sensors in series in this
way.

Step 3 Set DIP switches of the T/H sensors.

Figure 14-62 DIP switch

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 338
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Table 14-9 DIP switch settings on T/H sensors


Locati Display Name Addr DIP Switch No.
on ess
1 2 3 4 5 6

Return Return air 2 1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF


air temp/humid
side

Cold Cold aisle 1 11 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF


aisle temp/humid

Cold aisle 2 12 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF


temp/humid

Cold aisle 3 13 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF


temp/humid

Cold aisle 4 14 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF


temp/humid

Cold aisle 5 15 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF


temp/humid

Hot Hot aisle 1 21 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF


aisle temp/humid

Hot aisle 2 22 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF


temp/humid

Hot aisle 3 23 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF


temp/humid

Hot aisle 4 24 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF


temp/humid

Hot aisle 5 25 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF


temp/humid

NOTICE

● Keep the last RS485_R DIP switch in OFF position.


● After the addresses are set, power on the device, choose Settings > System
Settings > T/H Sensor on the home screen of the LCD on the smart cooling
product, and set the sensors in the aisles corresponding to the addresses to
Enable. Otherwise, the sensors will not work.

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 339
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

14.11.2 (Optional) Installing an Ambient T/H Sensor


(33010516)
Context
If the smart cooling product implements cold aisle control, install the T/H sensor
on the front door frame of the IT cabinet. If the smart cooling product implements
hot aisle control, install the T/H sensor on the rear door frame of the IT cabinet.

Procedure
Step 1 Attach the bottom of the T/H sensor to the 33 U position on the IT cabinet door
frame.
NOTE

The T/H sensor can be installed between the 33 U and 40 U positions based on site
requirements.

Figure 14-63 Installing a T/H sensor

Step 2 Set the DIP switch on the T/H sensor. For details, see Table 14-10.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 340
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Table 14-10 DIP switch settings on T/H sensors


Locati Display Name Addr DIP Switch No.
on ess
1 2 3 4 5 6

Cold Cold aisle 1 11 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF


aisle temp/humid

Cold aisle 2 12 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF


temp/humid

Cold aisle 3 13 ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF


temp/humid

Cold aisle 4 14 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF


temp/humid

Cold aisle 5 15 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF


temp/humid

Hot Hot aisle 1 21 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF


aisle temp/humid

Hot aisle 2 22 OFF ON ON OFF ON OFF


temp/humid

Hot aisle 3 23 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF


temp/humid

Hot aisle 4 24 OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF


temp/humid

Hot aisle 5 25 ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF


temp/humid

NOTICE

● Keep the last RS485_R DIP switch in OFF position.


● After the addresses are set, power on the device, choose Settings > System
Settings > T/H Sensor on the home screen of the LCD on the smart cooling
product, and set the sensors in the aisles corresponding to the addresses to
Enable. Otherwise, the sensors will not work.

----End

14.12 Installing a WLDS900 Water Sensor (33010352)


The water sensor mentioned in this section is configured for the smart module,
rather than smart cooling products. If this water sensor is installed, you do not
need to install the water sensors for smart cooling products.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 341
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

NOTICE

The water sensor cannot be installed in a place (such as water pipes or cold air
outlets) that is prone to condensing.

14.12.1 Laying Out the Water Detection Cable (Dual-Row


Scenario)
Context

Figure 14-64 Laying out the water detection cable (2000 mm high cabinet with
top pipe routing)

(1) ECC800-Pro (2) Network cable (3) Water detector

(4) Water detection cable (5) Smart cooling product


drainpipe

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 342
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

NOTE

For a 2200 mm high cabinet with top pipe routing, route the water detection cable along the
smart cooling product water pipe, and bind the water detection cable to the bottom of the
water pipe using cable ties.

Figure 14-65 Laying out a water detection cable (bottom pipe routing)

(1) ECC800-Pro (2) Network cable (3) Water detector (4) Water detection
cable

NOTICE

Do not contact the water detection cable to metal, for this action will cause a
false alarm. Take protective measures when routing a water detection cable.

14.12.2 Connecting a Cable to the WLDS900 Water Sensor


Context
● The water sensor is composed of the water detection cable (BOM number:
33010445), water detector (BOM number: 33010352), and conversion cable

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 343
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

(packed with the water detector). Cable ties (BOM number: 21200635) are
also provided.
● When the pipes of smart cooling products are routed from the top, the water
detector is installed in the network cabinet and its opposite cabinet, and
bound to the rack rail at the rear door using cable ties. The binding position is
5 U away from the cabinet top.
● When the pipes of smart cooling products are routed from the bottom, the
water detector is installed in the network cabinet, and bound to the rack rail
at the rear door using cable ties. The binding position is 5 U away from the
cabinet bottom.
● A single water detection cable is 5 meters long. If a longer cable is required,
connect multiple water detection cables to increase the length. One water
detector can connect to a maximum of nine water detection cables.

Figure 14-66 Water sensor

(1) Water detector (2) Conversion cable end A, (3) Conversion cable
connecting to the water
detector

(4) Conversion cable end B, (5) Water detection cable end (6) Water detection cable
connecting to the water A, connecting to the
detection cable conversion cable

Preparations
Materials: water detection cable, conversion cable

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the water detection cable to the conversion cable.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 344
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-67 Connecting cables

(1) Conversion cable end B, connecting to the (2) Water detection cable end A, connecting to
water detection cable the conversion cable

NOTE

The water detection cable and conversion cable are interconnected through male and
female connectors.

Step 2 Connect the other end of the conversion cable to the water detector.

Figure 14-68 Connecting the water detector

----End

14.12.3 Routing the Water Detection Cable

Context

NOTICE

Do not contact the water detection cable to metal, for this action will cause a
false alarm. Take protective measures when routing a water detection cable.

Preparations
Materials: water detection cable fastener, water detection cable, and accessories

Document: water detection cable routing position diagram

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 345
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Procedure
Step 1 Plan the installation position for the fastener of the water detection cable. Ensure
that the water detection cable placed on the fastener is in good contact with the
floor.
NOTE

One fastener is provided for a 1 m long water detection cable.

Step 2 Tear off the protection paper from the rear of the fastener, and then securely
attach the fastener to the floor.

Figure 14-69 Installing a fastener

NOTE

When securing the water detection cable to the concrete floor, use the cable clamp delivered
with the cable to secure the cable.

Figure 14-70 Installing a clamp

Step 3 Place the water detection cable onto the fastener, secure the fastener, and keep
the water detection cable in close contact with the floor.
NOTE

If multiple water detection cables need to be connected in series, connect the male
connector of one cable to the female connector of another cable.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 346
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-71 Securing a water detection cable

----End

14.13 Installing a GSM Modem


Prerequisites
An idle serial port is available on the TaiShan server.

Context

Figure 14-72 Ports on the GSM modem

(1) SIM card slot (2) Antenna port

(3) Power cable port (4) Serial port

Preparations
Materials: GSM modem (BOM number: 50030084), SIM card, antenna (BOM
number: 27010824), power adapter, power connector (BOM number: 14190143),
cable tie

Procedure
Step 1 Use a cable tie to bind the GSM modem to a position near the TaiShan server and
on the rack rail of the rear door of the network cabinet.
Step 2 Press the yellow button using a pointed object (such as a thin screwdriver) to eject
the SIM card tray. Place the SIM card in the correct position and push the tray in
place.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 347
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 14 Installing Monitoring Devices

Figure 14-73 Installing a SIM card

Step 3 Attach the antenna to the skylight connective plate or the top plate of the
network cabinet outside the aisle containment. Connect the antenna cable to the
antenna port on the modem.
NOTE

Do not use the antenna delivered with the modem.

Step 4 Connect one end of the serial port cable to the serial port on the GSM modem,
and connect the other end to an idle port on the TaiShan server.
NOTE

● For the connection method, see the documents delivered with the modem.
● If the serial port on the NetEco server does not match the connector of the serial port
cable, use the serial port cable adapter delivered with the modem.

Step 5 Connect one end of the power adapter to the modem and the other end to the
220 V power supply through a power connector.
NOTE

● Use the power adapter delivered with the modem.


● For the connection method, see the documents delivered with the modem.

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 348
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

15 Connecting Cables

15.1 System Cabling Rules


Attaching Cable Labels

NOTICE

A cable label must be consistent with the corresponding IT cabinet number.

● Find the corresponding cable based on the wiring diagram in the cable fitting
bag, and wrap the corresponding cable labels taken out from the cable fitting
bag around the cable at both ends.
NOTE

The cable labels must completely wrap the cable without wrinkles.
● Attach the cable labels 20 mm away from the plug except for special
circumstances. For example, a label should not be attached to the bending
part of a cable or attached in some positions that may affect cable
installation.
● If a label and a cable tie must be attached at the same place, attach the label
next to the cable tie.
● Attach labels to both ends of a cable.

Requirements for Neatly Routing and Binding Cables


To route and bind cables in an appealing way, follow these rules:
1. Neatly organize exterior cables in a large bundle of cables and prevent cable
tangles when possible, as shown in Figure 15-1.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 349
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-1 Neatly organizing cables

2. Keep a large number of cables neat and appealing in the network cabinet by
using cable organizers. Move the excess parts of cables in unnoticeable
positions. See Figure 15-2.

Figure 15-2 Cable organizer

3. Route and lay out a large number of cables in different areas to ensure neat
cabling and facilitate cable search and maintenance.
4. Route several flat cables along the same path and then overlap them as one.
5. Arrange cables on distinct layers and prevent cable tangles that are avoidable
when cables in different colors are bound together, as shown in Figure 15-3.
Also comply with these rules when cables of different thickness are bound
together. Arrange cables by thickness when arrangement by thickness
conflicts with arrangement by color.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 350
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-3 Binding cables in different colors

Cable Spacing Requirements


Comply with the following requirements if possible to lay out different types of
cables:
1. Bind cables of the same type together. When routing cables of different types,
ensure that they are at least 30 mm away from each other.
2. When routing cables, ensure that a distance of at least 30 mm exists between
the cables and heat-generating components or areas. This prevents damage
to the insulation layer of the cables.
3. Separate AC and DC power cables from non-shielded signal cables. Keep the
cable spacing greater than 100 mm or use grounded metal for isolation
purposes. Do not bind the cables together. Preferentially route the cables
along different sides of cabinets.
4. It is recommended that network cables and optical fiber cables be routed
separately.

Safety and Reliability Requirements for Routing and Binding Cables


1. Unless otherwise specified in a design file, ensure that the bend radius (R) of
a cable meets the following requirements:
– Common cable: R ≥ 3d
– Optical cable: R ≥ 40 mm
NOTE

R indicates the bend radius, and d indicates the cable diameter.


2. Reserve slack at cable connection positions to facilitate connection and
disconnection and to prevent stress. Do not leave the cables tight and prevent
connector misalignment, as shown in Figure 15-4.

Figure 15-4 Cable connection positions

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 351
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

3. Before installing a semi-flexible cable, use a dedicated tool to curve the cable.
Do not curve the cable while holding the cable connector by hand.
4. If a number of wire terminals are connected to a multi-point connector,
provide slack and arrange them neatly to prevent stress on certain wires, as
shown in Figure 15-5.

Figure 15-5 Cable connections

5. Protect cable holes in a metal kit with grommet strips. Alternatively, ensure
that the holes are rounded, free from burrs or sharp edges.
6. Keep cables far away from heat sources such as radiators and heat vents. If
unavoidable, take heat resistant measures.
7. Keep cables far away from operating components such as fan blades and do
not bind cables to an airflow path of fans.
8. Prevent moveable components such as doors from squeezing or pulling
cables.

Cable Binding Requirements


Bind cables reliably along the route and ensure that the binding interval meets the
requirements in GB 50343-2012 Technical Code for Protection of Building
Electronic Information System Against Lightning.

Table 15-1 Cable binding interval


Cable Bundle Diameter (mm) Binding Interval (mm)

< 10 150

10–30 200

> 30 300

1. Bind cables with a moderate force and ensure that cables are not misshapen
to prevent compromising the signal quality.
2. After binding cables, cut off the excess parts of cable ties and trim away any
burrs, as shown in Figure 15-6.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 352
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-6 Cutting off the excess part of a cable tie

3. Do not use cable ties at a place where the cables are bent. Otherwise, the
cable cores may break due to excessive stress, as shown in Figure 15-7.

Figure 15-7 Binding cables in a bending area

4. Ensure that the cable ties are wrapped and secured in the same direction and
do not hamper subsequent operations, as shown in Figure 15-8.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 353
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-8 Direction for securing cable ties

15.2 Cable Connection Process


Preparations
Tools: thin rope, protective gloves, measuring tape

Materials: cable, marker, label

Procedure
Step 1 Use a thin rope to measure the required cable length based on the actual cable
route.
NOTE

● To improve installation efficiency, complete all cable measurements before you perform
subsequent operations.
● You are advised to lay out cables to the measured cable route length plus about 1 m.

Step 2 Route cables.


1. Select the designed cables.
2. Lay out cables to the required length.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the cable sheathings, do not press or stab cables with a
hard object and do not drag cables on the ground at will during cable layout.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 354
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

3. Attach labels to both ends of cables that you have laid out.

NOTICE

Ensure that the labels are clear, endurable, and consistent between both ends.

Step 3 Label cables.


1. (Optional) Prepare labels based on site requirements.

NOTICE

– Label information must be clear and specific.


– Labels must be easy to attach and can be securely attached.
– Labels must be resistant to corrosion and deterioration.

2. Remove the simple labels attached to a cable during layout and attach labels
to both ends of the cable.

NOTICE

– Labels must be securely attached.


– Labels must be attached in eye-catching positions on cables to facilitate
viewing and maintenance.
– The labels on both ends of a cable must be the same.

----End

15.3 Cable Routes for the Dual-Row Aisle Containment


Scenario (Power Supply and Distribution Cabinet)

NOTICE

Ensure that electric cables and ELV cables are at least 100 mm away from each
other.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 355
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-9 Routing power and signal cables (cable trough scenario)

(1) Network cabinet (2) Optical fiber cables (3) Signal cables

(4) Smart ETH gateway (5) PDF (6) Power cables

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 356
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-10 Routing power and signal cables (mesh cable trough scenario)

(1) Network cabinet (2) Signal cables (3) Power cables

(4) Optical fiber cables (5) PDF

15.4 Cable Routes for the Dual-Row Aisle Containment


Scenario (Smart Busbar)

NOTICE

● Ensure that electric cables and ELV cables are at least 100 mm away from each
other.
● Power cables are first connected to the general input unit in the smart module.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 357
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-11 Routing power and signal cables (cable trough scenario)

(1) General input unit (2) Power distribution unit (3) Network cabinet

(4) Power cables (5) Busbar trunking unit (6) Signal cables

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 358
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-12 Routing power and signal cables (mesh cable trough scenario)

(1) General input unit (2) Power distribution unit (3) Network cabinet

(4) Power cables (5) Busbar trunking unit (6) Signal cables

15.5 Cable Routes for the Dual-Row Aisle Containment


Scenario (Smart Busbar 2.0 LAN Switch)

NOTICE

● Ensure that electric cables and ELV cables are at least 100 mm away from each
other.
● Power cables are first connected to the general input unit in the smart module.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 359
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-13 Routing power and signal cables (cable trough scenario)

(1) General input unit (2) Power distribution (3) Busbar trunking (4) Power cable
unit unit

(5) FE ring network (6) Network cabinet (7) Network cable


cable

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 360
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-14 Routing power and signal cables (mesh cable trough scenario)

(1) General input unit (2) Power distribution (3) Busbar trunking (4) Power cable
unit unit

(5) FE ring network (6) Network cabinet (7) Network cable


cable

NOTICE

● Install cables between the smart busbar and the LAN switch and between the
LAN switch and the PoE device. Figure 15-15 shows the cable routes.
● The cable length varies according to the position of the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 361
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-15 Cable connections when two LAN switches are configured

15.6 (Optional) Cable Routes for a Smart Cooling


Product PDB
● Cables are routed in from the top and routed out from the top or bottom of
the smart cooling product PDB.
● The smart cooling product PDB uses three-phase, five-wire input power
cables, including N, PE, L1, L2, and L3.
● The smart cooling product PDB uses three-phase, three-wire output power
cables, including L1, L2, and L3.
● Connect one end of two communications cables of the smart cooling product
PDB to the RS485+ port and RS485– port respectively, and the other end of
the two communication cables to the COM3 port on the ECC800-Pro
respectively.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 362
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-16 Routing cables for a smart cooling product PDB

(1) Input cable connections for the smart (2) Smart cooling product PDB (powered by
cooling product PDB the customer's power supply)

(3) Output cable connections for the smart (4) Communications cable connections for the
cooling product PDB smart cooling product PDB

(5) Smart cooling product

NOTE

The figure is for reference only. The actual scenario may vary.

15.7 Connecting Cables for the Power Supply and


Distribution System

15.7.1 rPDU Naming in an IT Cabinet


The rPDU needs to be installed at the rear of an IT cabinet. For a cabinet where
the doors have round holes, install it on the left side. For a cabinet where the
doors have hexagonal meshes, install it on the right side.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 363
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-17 rPDU naming in an IT cabinet

Figure 15-18 Wiring diagram naming description

The wiring diagrams use single-phase full-height rPDUs as an example. In single-


phase half-height rPDU and three-phase full-height rPDU scenarios, the wiring
diagram naming is shown in the following figure.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 364
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-19 Wiring diagrams for rPDUs with different configurations

15.7.2 (Optional) Connecting Cables to an Integrated PDF


Wiring principles in an N+1 scenario:
● Connect output cables based on the switch number sequence (ascending
order). Connection sequence: route A in row A → route A in row B → route B
in row A → route B in row B for IT cabinets.
● Twelve QFs are reserved respectively for route A (1QF1–1QF12) in row A,
route A (1QF13–1QF24) in row B, route B (1QF25–1QF36) in row A, and route
B (1QF37–1QF48) in row B for IT cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 365
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-20 Wiring in an N+1 power distribution scenario (single input of smart
cooling product power distribution)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 366
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-21 Wiring in an N+1 power distribution scenario (dual inputs of smart
cooling product power distribution)

Wiring principles in a 2N non-physical isolation scenario:


● 1QFn in the PDF supplies power to the route A rPDUs of all the cabinets in
the aisle. 2QFn in the PDF supplies power to the route B rPDUs of all the
cabinets in the aisle.
● Connect output cables based on the switch number sequence (ascending
order) for each route. Connection sequence: row A IT cabinets → row B IT
cabinets.
● Twelve QFs are reserved respectively for route A (1QF1–1QF12) in row A,
route A (1QF13–1QF24) in row B, route B (2QF1–2QF12) in row A, and route
B (2QF13–2QF24) in row B for IT cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 367
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-22 Wiring in a 2N power distribution non-physical isolation scenario

Wiring principles in a 2N physical isolation scenario:


● PDF-A supplies power to the route A rPDUs of all the cabinets in the aisle.
PDF-B supplies power to the route B rPDUs of all the cabinets in the aisle.
● In each PDF, connect output cables based on the switch number sequence
(ascending order). Connection sequence: row A IT cabinets → row B IT
cabinets.
● PDF-A distributes power to route A (1QF1–1QF24) in row A and route A
(1QF25–1QF48) in row B for IT cabinets.
● PDF-B distributes power to route B (1QF1–1QF24) in row A and route B
(1QF25–1QF48) in row B for IT cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 368
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-23 Wiring in a 2N power distribution physical isolation scenario

15.7.3 (Optional) Connecting Cables to an Integrated UPS


Wiring principles in an N+1 scenario:
● The power distribution of the integrated UPS is labeled as PDF-A in the figure.
● Connect output cables based on the switch number sequence (ascending
order). Connection sequence: route A in row A → route A in row B → route B
in row A → route B in row B for IT cabinets.
● Twelve QFs are reserved respectively for route A (1QF1–1QF12) in row A,
route A (1QF13–1QF24) in row B, route B (2QF1–2QF12) in row A, and route
B (2QF13–2QF24) in row B for IT cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 369
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-24 Wiring in an N+1 power distribution scenario

Wiring principles in a 2N physical isolation scenario:


● The power distribution of the integrated UPS-A is labeled as PDF-A in the
figure. The power distribution of the integrated UPS-B is labeled as PDF-B in
the figure.
● PDF-A supplies power to the route A rPDUs of all the cabinets in the aisle.
PDF-B supplies power to the route B rPDUs of all the cabinets in the aisle.
● In each PDF, connect output cables based on the switch number sequence
(ascending order). Connection sequence: row A IT cabinets → row B IT
cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 370
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-25 Wiring in a 2N power distribution physical isolation scenario

15.7.4 (Optional) Connecting Cables to a Precision PDF


Wiring principles in an N+1 scenario:
● Connect output cables based on the switch number sequence (ascending
order). Connection sequence: route A in row A → route A in row B → route B
in row A → route B in row B for IT cabinets.
● The configuration in the figure is used as an example: route A (1QF1–1QF8)
in row A, route A (1QF9–1QF17) in row B, route B (1QF18–1QF25) in row A,
and route B (1QF26–1QF34) in row B for IT cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 371
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-26 Wiring in an N+1 power distribution scenario

NOTE

The preceding figure uses a fully configured output subrack as an example. When there are two
fully configured output subracks, the serial numbers are arranged based on the following rule.
Connect output cables based on the switch number sequence (ascending order).

Figure 15-27 Serial number definition of two fully configured output subracks

Wiring principles in a 2N non-physical isolation scenario:


● 1QFn in the PDF supplies power to the route A rPDUs of all the cabinets in
the aisle. 2QFn in the PDF supplies power to the route B rPDUs of all the
cabinets in the aisle.
● Connect output cables based on the switch number sequence (ascending
order) for each route. Connection sequence: row A IT cabinets → row B IT
cabinets.
● The configuration in the figure is used as an example: route A (1QF1–1QF8)
in row A, route A (1QF9–1QF17) in row B, route B (2QF1–2QF8) in row A, and
route B (2QF9–2QF17) in row B for IT cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 372
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-28 Wiring in a 2N power distribution non-physical isolation scenario

Wiring principles in a 2N physical isolation scenario:


● PDF-A supplies power to the route A rPDUs of all the cabinets in the aisle.
PDF-B supplies power to the route B rPDUs of all the cabinets in the aisle.
● In each PDF, connect output cables based on the switch number sequence
(ascending order). Connection sequence: row A IT cabinets → row B IT
cabinets.
● The configuration in the figure is used as an example: PDF-A distributes
power to route A (1QF1–1QF8) in row A and route A (1QF9–1QF17) in row B
for IT cabinets.
● The configuration in the figure is used as an example: PDF-B distributes
power to route B (1QF1–1QF8) in row A and route B (1QF9–1QF17) in row B
for IT cabinets.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 373
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-29 Wiring in a 2N power distribution physical isolation scenario

Wiring principles for smart cooling product PDBs:


● In the smart cooling product PDB, connect output cables based on the switch
number sequence (ascending order). Connection sequence: smart cooling
product cabinets in row A → smart cooling product cabinets in row B →
actuators.
● The output switches corresponding to the smart cooling products are
numbered from QF1 to QF8. The output switches corresponding to the
actuators are numbered from QF9 to QF11.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 374
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-30 Wiring for smart cooling product PDBs with N+1 power distribution

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 375
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-31 Wiring for smart cooling product PDBs with 2N power distribution

15.7.5 (Optional) Connecting Cables to Lead-Acid Batteries


For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or Battery Cabinet Battery Cable Connection
Quick Guide.

Precautions for Connecting Lead-Acid Battery Cables


● Battery trays consist of supports and trays, with space reserved between
supports and trays on adjacent layers for operation. To remove the lead-acid
battery trays, perform the following operations:
a. Remove the lead-acid battery trays from top to bottom.
b. Install lead-acid batteries and connect cables from bottom to top.

NOTICE

When installing lead-acid batteries, install lead-acid battery trays first,


and then place lead-acid batteries onto the trays and connect cables. Do
not move all the lead-acid batteries into the cabinet after placing them
on the trays and connecting cables.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 376
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

● When placing lead-acid batteries, install separators between adjacent lead-


acid batteries. If the lead-acid battery capacity is 65 Ah or more, there is no
need to install a separator in the depth direction of the lead-acid battery
cabinet. After placing the batteries, attach the battery labels on the middle
position at the battery top from positive terminals in sequence based on the
wiring diagram.

Figure 15-32 Installing a separator

Figure 15-33 Attaching a battery label

● Route and secure cables between layers along the rack rail in the vertical
direction, as shown by (1) in Figure 15-34.
● Route and secure cables between layers along the tray supporting beam in
the horizontal direction, as shown by (2) in Figure 15-34.

Figure 15-34 Cable routes

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 377
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

● (Optional) If battery cabinets are installed adjacent to each other, remove the
upper side plates from the battery cabinets for routing cables to the
corresponding ports.

Correct Method for Connecting Lead-Acid Battery Cables


● If the length of a lead-acid battery cable equals the distance between two
lead-acid battery terminals, connect the cable straight through.

Figure 15-35 Directly connecting two batteries

● If the length of a lead-acid battery cable is longer than the distance between
two lead-acid battery terminals, connect the cable in the way shown in Figure
15-36. To prevent misshaping lead-acid battery terminals, do not connect the
cable in the way shown in Figure 15-37.

Figure 15-36 Correct cable connection

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 378
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-37 Incorrect cable connection

Connecting Cables to the Circuit Breaker in a Battery Cabinet

CAUTION

Before connecting cables, ensure that the circuit breaker is OFF.

Connect cables to a circuit breaker as follows:


1. Remove the circuit breaker panel.
2. Connect cables to lead-acid battery terminals +, N, and –.
3. Connect cables to UPS terminals +, N, and –.
4. (Optional) If two lead-acid battery strings are deployed, connect the UPS
terminals +, N, and – for one lead-acid battery string to the UPS terminals +,
N, and – for the other lead-acid battery string.

Figure 15-38 Connecting circuit breaker power cables

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 379
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

5. (Optional) If the intelligent battery monitoring system is not configured, use a


04080376 cable to connect the J1 port on the battery control board (BIB) to
the corresponding port on the UPS. Alternatively, use a 04080377 cable for
cascading and use a 04080376 cable for connecting to the corresponding port
on the UPS.

Figure 15-39 Connecting circuit breaker monitoring cables

Installing Panels
1. Reinstall the circuit breaker panel.
2. Secure filler panels to the rack rails on the rear door.

NOTE

Each filler panel occupies 2 U. Install them according to the U position markings on the cabinet.
Ensure that filler panels fully cover the rack rails.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 380
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-40 Installing filler panels

15.7.6 (Optional) Connecting Cables to the SmartLi Outside


the Smart Module
For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or SmartLi 3.0 User Manual (Long-Term
Backup Power).

15.7.7 (Optional) Installing Smart Busbar Cables


For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning QR code, or NMW Smart Busbar 2.0 User Manual and NMW
Smart Busbar 2.1 User Manual.

15.7.8 (Optional) Connecting Cables to Industrial Connectors

NOTICE

Figure 15-41 to Figure 15-42 show only the cable connection methods. The
industrial connector cable connections depend on the connector type and wiring
port silk screen.

Figure 15-41 Connecting a cable to an industrial connector (three-core cable)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 381
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-42 Connecting a cable to an industrial connector (five-core cable)

15.7.9 (Optional) Connecting rPDU Cables


Context
If the rPDU is not provided with industrial connectors, connect the rPDU cables
and lay out the cables on the cabinet top.

Preparations
Tools: insulated Phillips screwdriver, insulated flat-head screwdriver, diagonal
pliers, and protective gloves
Material: cable tie

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the rPDU cables.

NOTICE

rPDU cable connections depend on the rPDU type and wiring port silk screen.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 382
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-43 Connecting rPDU cables

Step 2 Remove the rodent-proof mesh from the top of the cabinet, use diagonal pliers to
cut an opening that allows cables to run through, and take out the rPDU cables
through the opening.
Step 3 Lay out the rPDU cables on the top of the cabinet and reinstall the rodent-proof
mesh.
Step 4 Install the rPDU cables for other IT cabinets in the same way.

----End

Follow-up Procedure
Before connecting the power plug of a device to the rPDU, loosen the locking
device on the rPDU. After connecting the power plug, tighten the locking device.

15.7.10 Connecting Smart rPDU Signal Cables (Connected to


the UIM20A Expansion Module)

Context
One end of the signal cables has been connected to the smart rPDU.
The BOM number of the smart rPDU is 02122280.
The installation position for the smart rPDU near the cabinet rear door varies
depending on the actual product.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 383
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Procedure
Step 1 Connect the signal cables of the smart rPDU that are bound at the top of the
cabinet to the COM1/AIDI_1 and COM2/AIDI_2 ports on the UIM20A expansion
module.

NOTICE

● COM1/AIDI_1 corresponds to route A of the cabinet, and COM2/AIDI_2


corresponds to route B of the cabinet. If they are connected incorrectly, the
alarm convergence feature cannot be implemented.
● The appearance of the smart rPDU may vary. Select an appropriate connection
mode based on the actual situation.
● The installation position of the smart rPDU in the cabinet may vary. The figure
is for reference only.

Figure 15-44 Connecting smart rPDU signal cables

Step 2 Bind the cables to the cabinet using cable ties.

----End

Example
The signal cables are delivered with the materials. If the signal cables are lost,
prepare signal cables based on the following definition of signal cable terminals.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 384
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-45 Smart rPDU signal cable

Table 15-2 Signal cable terminal definition


rPDU Color (Status) UIM20A Expansion
Module

X1.1 Disconnected X2.1

X1.2 Disconnected X2.2

X1.3 Disconnected X2.3

X1.4 Blue X2.4

X1.5 Blue-and-white X2.5

X1.6 Disconnected X2.6

X1.7 Disconnected X2.7

X1.8 Disconnected X2.8

15.8 Connecting Cables for the Cooling System


For details, see the documents delivered with the equipment, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or NetCol5000-A(025, 035) In-row Air Cooled
Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide (300 mm Width), NetCol5000-A050 In-row Air
Cooled Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide, FusionCol5000-A065 In-row Air
Cooled Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide, and FusionCol5000-A050 In-row Air
Cooled Smart Cooling Product Quick Guide.

15.9 Installing Cables for the Facility Management


System
For details, see the documents delivered with packing case 0, the documents
obtained by scanning the QR code, or FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data
Center Quick Guide.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 385
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

15.10 Cable Routes for Aisle Lights (FusionModule


Actuator Scenario)
Figure 15-46 Cable routes for aisle lights (dual-row scenario)

(1) FusionModule Actuator (2) Light (3) Light button

15.11 Cable Routes for the PAD and Access Control


Device
The cable routes for the PAD and access control device apply to both sliding doors
and revolving doors. The following figure uses a sliding door as an example.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 386
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-47 Cable routes for the PAD and access control device (sliding door
scenario)

15.12 Cable Route Between the Smart Screen and


Smart ETH Gateway
The cable route between the smart screen and smart ETH gateway applies to both
sliding doors and revolving doors. The following figure uses a sliding door as an
example.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 387
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-48 Cable route between the smart screen and smart ETH gateway
(sliding door scenario)

15.13 Cable Route Between the Smart Screen and LAN


Switch
The cable route between the smart screen and LAN switch applies to both sliding
doors and revolving doors. The following figure uses a sliding door as an example.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 388
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-49 Cable route between the smart screen and LAN switch (sliding door
scenario)

15.14 Cable Routes for Cabinet Card and Fingerprint


Locks
● Connect the card and fingerprint lock on the front door of a cabinet to the
COM3/AIDI_3 port on the UIM20A expansion module, and connect the one on
the rear door to the COM4/AIDI_4 port.
● Connect the card and fingerprint lock on the front door of a cabinet to the
COM/DI 1 port on the PDU2000M, and connect the one on the rear door to
the COM/DI 2 port on the PDU2000M.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 389
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-50 Cable route for the card and fingerprint lock on the front door
of a cabinet (connecting to the UIM20A expansion module)

Figure 15-51 Cable route for the card and fingerprint lock on the front door
of a cabinet (connecting to the PDU2000M main control module)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 390
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-52 Cable route for the card and fingerprint lock on the rear door of
a cabinet (connecting to the UIM20A expansion module)

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 391
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-53 Cable route for the card and fingerprint lock on the rear door of
a cabinet (connecting to the PDU2000M main control module)

15.15 Cable Route for the FusionModule Actuator


Connect the PGND port on the FusionModule Actuator to the 48V_OUT1 port on
the nearby smart ETH gateway, and connect the AC IN port to the upstream fuse
on the end door.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 392
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide 15 Connecting Cables

Figure 15-54 Cable route for the FusionModule Actuator

(1) Emergency exit button (2) Upstream fuse (3) FusionModule Actuator

(4) Power cable (5) Smart ETH gateway (6) Signal cable

(7) Alarm beacon (8) PAD (9) Access control device

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 393
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

A Appendix

A.1 Installing an Expansion Bolt


Preparations
Tools: adjustable wrench, hammer drill, rubber mallet, protective gloves, vacuum
cleaner
Material: expansion bolt

Procedure
Step 1 Drill a hole at the position for installing the expansion bolt using a hammer drill
with the hole depth of 52 mm to 60 mm.
Step 2 Partially tighten the expansion bolt and vertically insert it into the hole. Knock the
expansion bolt using a rubber mallet until the expansion sleeve is fully inserted
into the hole.
Step 3 Rotate the expansion bolt clockwise using a wrench until the expansion sleeve
fully expands.
Step 4 Rotate the expansion bolt counterclockwise to remove it together with the spring
washer and flat washer.
NOTE

Put aside the removed expansion bolt for securing the cabinet.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 394
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

Figure A-1 Expansion bolt

(1) M12 bolt (2) Spring washer

(3) Flat washer (4) Expansion sleeve

Figure A-2 Drilling a hole and installing an expansion bolt (unit: mm)

----End

A.2 Cable Routes Inside an IT Cabinet


NOTE

● Signal cables or weak-current cables inside cabinets are sorted by cable managers, cable
rings, and cable trays.
● The cable colors shown in figures are for reference only.

Figure A-3, Figure A-4, and Figure A-5 show the routes of the cables out from
the front of customer equipment.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 395
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

Figure A-3 Cable route along a horizontal cable manager

(1) Cable manager (2) Small cable ring

(3) Customer equipment

NOTE

● The small cable ring is optional and used to manage the cable routes in the vertical
direction.
● The cable manager is installed in the front of a cabinet by default. You can install it in
the rear of a cabinet if necessary.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 396
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

Figure A-4 Cable route along a cable tray

(1) Cable tray (2) Big cable ring

(3) Customer equipment

NOTE

The cable tray is optional and used to lead cables from the cabinet front to the cabinet rear.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 397
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

Figure A-5 Cable route along a depth-directed cable tray

(1) Cable tray (2) Depth-directed cable tray

(3) Big cable ring (4) Customer equipment

NOTE

● The cable tray is optional and used to lead cables from the cabinet front to the cabinet
rear.
● The depth-directed cable tray is optional and used to manage the cable routes on the
side of a cabinet.

Figure A-6 and Figure A-7 show the routes of the cables out from the rear of
customer equipment.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 398
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

Figure A-6 Power cable route

Figure A-7 Signal cable route

A.3 Cable Routes for the Network Cabinet

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 399
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

Figure A-8 Cable routes for the network cabinet

(1) Power cable (2) Signal cable

A.4 Preparing Monitoring Cables

CAUTION

Stay away from the equipment when preparing cables to prevent cable scraps
from entering the equipment. Cable scraps may cause sparks and result in
personal injury and equipment damage.

Prerequisites
● A network cable, cord end terminals, and RJ45 connectors are prepared.
● The following tools are prepared:
– Wire stripper
– Crimping tool
– RJ45 crimping tool
– Electrician's knife
– Insulation tape

Preparing a Cord End Terminal


Figure A-9 shows how to prepare a cord end terminal.

1. Strip the insulation layer of cable B to expose cable core C.


2. Put cable core C through cord end terminal A.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 400
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

3. Crimp the metal part of cord end terminal A using the crimping tool.

Figure A-9 Preparing a cord end terminal

(A) Cord end terminal (B) Insulation layer (C) Copper core wire
connector

Preparing RS485 Monitoring Cables


Figure A-10 shows how to prepare an RS485 monitoring cable for the ECC
collector.

Figure A-10 Preparing an RS485 monitoring cable for the ECC collector

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 401
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

Preparing a Dry Contact Monitoring Cable


The method for preparing a dry contact monitoring cable is similar to the method
for preparing an RS485 monitoring cable. Prepare cord end terminals on both ends
of each required cable core based on the number of dry contacts.

A.5 L1 Power Supply Solution (FusionModule Actuator


Scenario)
Figure A-11 L1 power supply solution (inside the aisle)

A.6 (Optional) Connecting Linkage Cables Between the


Gas Extinguishing Controller and Equipment Room ATS
Context

NOTICE

After a linkage cable is connected between the gas extinguishing controller and
equipment room ATS, if the gas extinguishing controller generates a fire signal,
the ATS disconnects non-firefighting power supply and stops supplying power to
smart cooling products in the data center.

Linkage cables can be connected between the gas extinguishing controller and
equipment room ATS in the following two ways:
● Link the fire alarm bell and ATS. When the fire alarm bell rings, the ATS
disconnects non-firefighting power supply.
● Link the alarm beacon and ATS. When the alarm beacon is triggered, the ATS
disconnects non-firefighting power supply.
This section describes how to link a JB-QBL-QM200 gas extinguishing controller
and the ATS using cables.

Preparations
Tool: Phillips screwdriver

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 402
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

Material: cable tie

Procedure
● Connect linkage cables between the drive output ports for the fire alarm bell
on the gas extinguishing controller and the non-firefighting power
disconnection ports on the ATS, as shown in Figure A-12.

Figure A-12 Connecting linkage cables between the fire alarm bell and ATS

● Connect linkage cables between the drive output ports for the alarm beacon
on the gas extinguishing controller and the non-firefighting power
disconnection ports on the ATS, as shown in Figure A-13.

Figure A-13 Connecting linkage cables between the alarm beacon and ATS

----End

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 403
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide A Appendix

A.7 (Optional) Connecting Linkage Cables Between the


Equipment Room Fire Extinguishing System and Access
Actuator
After linkage cables are connected between the equipment room fire
extinguishing system and access actuator, the access actuator opens data center
doors when the fire extinguishing system generates an alarm signal.
● Fire alarm signals are dry contact signals generated by the fire extinguishing
system selected by the customer.
● Fire alarm signals are valid only when the dry contact is closed.
Connect fire alarm signal cables to the DI– and DI+ pins at the AI/DI_1 or AI/DI_2
port on the access actuator. The following figure uses connection to the AI/DI_1
port as an example.

Figure A-14 Connecting fire alarm signal cables to the access actuator

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 404
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide B Verifying the Installation

B Verifying the Installation

Cabinet Installation Checklist


No. Item Check Result

1 The cabinets are placed according to the □ Passed □ Failed


equipment room layout diagram.

2 All cabinets are leveled. If there is a height □ Passed □ Failed


difference, the absolute value of difference is less
than or equal to 3 mm. After 2000 mm high
cabinets are leveled, the height of all cabinets is
greater than or equal to 2000 mm.

3 All cabinets are leveled. If there is a height □ Passed □ Failed


difference, the absolute value of difference is less
than or equal to 3 mm. After 2200 mm high
cabinets are leveled, the height of all cabinets is
greater than or equal to 2200 mm.

4 The height deviation of all cabinets and the depth □ Passed □ Failed
deviation of adjacent cabinets are less than 5 mm.

5 All bolts and screws are firmly tightened, □ Passed □ Failed


especially on electrical connections. Flat and
spring washers are used with each bolt, and
spring washers are placed on the top of flat
washers.

6 The distance (A) between cabinet doors inside the □ Passed □ Failed
dual-row aisle containment is A±3 mm.

8 The cabinets in both rows at the ends of the dual- □ Passed □ Failed
row aisle containment are placed with a front-
backward misalignment no greater than 1.5 mm.

10 All the four corners of each cabinet are fixed, the □ Passed □ Failed
screws are not loose, and the cabinets do not
shake.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 405
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide B Verifying the Installation

No. Item Check Result

11 The cabinets are clean and meet dustproof □ Passed □ Failed


requirements.

12 The paint on the cabinet exterior is intact. If paint □ Passed □ Failed


has flaked off, repaint that area to avoid
corrosion.

13 The cabinet doors can be opened and closed □ Passed □ Failed


smoothly, and the door locks function properly.

14 Labels in the cabinets are correct, clearly legible, □ Passed □ Failed


and complete, including the certificate of
qualification, nameplate, and logo.

15 The surroundings of the cabinets are clean. There □ Passed □ Failed


is no foreign matter such as adhesive tape, cable
ties, paper, or packing materials left around the
cabinets.

16 The cabinet filler panels are adjusted to ensure □ Passed □ Failed


that the cold aisle and hot aisle are isolated.

17 The ground cables to the front and rear doors of □ Passed □ Failed
the cabinets are securely connected.

Aisle Containment Installation Checklist


No. Item Check Result

1 All components of the aisle containment are □ Passed □ Failed


installed.

2 The end doors can be opened and closed □ Passed □ Failed


smoothly.

3 The gap between end doors is even. □ Passed □ Failed

4 After the end door is closed, the rubber strip in □ Passed □ Failed
the middle seals the gap properly.

5 After the double revolving door is closed, the □ Passed □ Failed


height deviation of the two door panels is less
than 5 mm.

6 The rotating skylights work smoothly. □ Passed □ Failed

7 The end planes of skylight connective plates are □ Passed □ Failed


flush with each other.

8 The skylight electromagnet firmly suctions the □ Passed □ Failed


skylight when the power is on, and the skylight
drops naturally when the power is off.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 406
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide B Verifying the Installation

No. Item Check Result

9 All labels are correct, clearly legible, and □ Passed □ Failed


complete.

10 There is no foreign matter such as adhesive tape, □ Passed □ Failed


cable ties, paper, or packing materials left in and
around the aisle.

Cable Installation Checklist


No. Item Check Result

1 All cable joints are secured properly, especially the □ Passed □ Failed
cable joints of network cables and cables inside
cabinets.

2 Exposed parts of cables and cable lugs near the □ Passed □ Failed
cable terminals are wrapped with insulation tape
or heat-shrink tubing.

3 All wiring terminals are securely installed with flat □ Passed □ Failed
washers and spring washers and are in good
contact.

4 Cables are bound neatly, and cable ties are □ Passed □ Failed
secured evenly and properly in the same direction.

5 Cables are routed in a way convenient for □ Passed □ Failed


maintenance and future capacity expansion.

6 All labels at the cable ends are clear. □ Passed □ Failed

7 Excess sections of cable ties are neatly cut. □ Passed □ Failed

8 There is no unnecessary adhesive tape or cable tie □ Passed □ Failed


on cables.

Electric Installation Checklist


No. Item Check Result

1 All ground cables are copper cables with □ Passed □ Failed


diameters meeting the requirements. No switch or
fuse is allowed on a ground cable, and no open
circuit occurs.

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 407
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide B Verifying the Installation

No. Item Check Result

2 All PE cables, AC input cables, and intra-cabinet □ Passed □ Failed


cables are connected correctly according to the
power system circuit diagram, and all screws are
fastened. The input and output cables are not
short-circuited.

3 Power cables and ground cables are not coiled □ Passed □ Failed
and excess parts are cut off.

4 Lugs for power cables and ground cables are □ Passed □ Failed
soldered or crimped securely.

5 Power cables and ground cables are routed and □ Passed □ Failed
bound separately from other cables.

6 Batteries are intact, free from damage, cracks, and □ Passed □ Failed
bulges.

7 Batteries are neat and clean, and do not leak □ Passed □ Failed
electrolyte.

8 Battery terminals are upright and free from □ Passed □ Failed


damage, break, and acid leakage.

9 Battery safety valves remain intact and experience □ Passed □ Failed


no electrolyte leaks.

10 Battery cables are correctly connected, and the □ Passed □ Failed


terminal voltages of battery strings are normal.

11 DIP switches on devices are correctly set. □ Passed □ Failed

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 408
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide C Common Screw Torques

C Common Screw Torques

NOTE

The common screw torques are for reference only. The specific torque requirements depend
on the connector material. If the following table conflicts with the installation requirements
of a specific product or device, the installation requirements of the product or device may
vary.

Application Scenario Screw Specifications Torque (N·m) (Tolerance:


±10%)

Board, module, or M2.5 captive screw 0.21–0.25


panel installation
M3 captive screw 0.38–0.42

Captive screw M2.5 0.3

M3 0.6

Guide rail installation Cross recessed pan head 3


thread forming screw
M5 (GB/T 6560-1986)

Subrack or box-type M3 screw assembly 0.6


module installation (mounting ear)

M4 countersunk screw 1.2


(mounting ear)

M6 panel screw 2

Ground M4 1.4

M6 4.8

M8 12

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 409
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide C Common Screw Torques

Application Scenario Screw Specifications Torque (N·m) (Tolerance:


±10%)

Cabinet or chassis ST3.5 tapping screw + 0.3


installation, cable plastic expansion sleeve
tray, upper fastener,
or antiseismic M4 1.2
enhancement Cross recessed pan head 3
installation, cabinet thread forming screw
combination, or M5 (GB/T 6560-1986)
outdoor cable clip
M6 3

M8/M8 expansion bolt 13


(tension/implosion)

M10/M10 expansion 25
bolt (tension/implosion)

M12/M12 expansion 45
bolt (tension/implosion)

DB style connector 2-56 (M2.5) 0.25

4-40 (M3) metal head 0.4


or plastic head

Positive and negative M6 4–6


battery terminals
M8 13–15

M10 15–20

OT terminal for M2 screw assembly 0.25


power cables
M3 screw assembly 0.6

M4 screw assembly 1.6

M5 screw assembly 4

M6 screw assembly 5

M8 screw assembly 8

M10 screw assembly 15

M12 screw assembly 26

M16 screw assembly 35

Cord end terminals M2 0.22–0.25

M2.5 0.5–0.6

M3 0.6–0.8

M3.5 0.8–1.6

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 410
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide C Common Screw Torques

Application Scenario Screw Specifications Torque (N·m) (Tolerance:


±10%)

M4 1.5–1.8

M5 2.5–3.0

M6 3.2–3.7

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 411
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide D Acronyms and Abbreviations

D Acronyms and Abbreviations

AC alternating current

ATS automatic transfer switch

BCB battery circuit breaker

BIB battery control I/O board

BIM battery interface module

BSPP British Standard Pipe


Parallel thread

BSPT British Standard Pipe


Taper thread

CIM communication interface


module

DC direct current

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 412
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide D Acronyms and Abbreviations

ECC energy control center

EPDM ethylene-propylene-diene
tripolymer

EPE expandable polyethylene

ETH Ethernet

FE fast Ethernet

IC integrated circuit

IT Internet technology

NTC negative temperature


coefficient

PDF power distribution frame

PDU power distribution unit

PE protective earthing

PoE power over Ethernet

PP-R polypropylene random

PVC polyvinyl chloride

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 413
FusionModule2000 6.0 Smart Modular Data Center
Installation Guide D Acronyms and Abbreviations

SD secure digital

SIM subscriber identity


module

UPS uninterruptible power


system

VCN video cloud node

WiFi wireless fidelity

Issue 06 (2023-11-30) Copyright © Huawei Digital Power Technologies Co., Ltd. 414

You might also like